Yamaha HTR-5460 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID
V722760
RX-V620
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
U C A
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
0100V620(UCA)-cv1/4 1/16/1, 11:06 AM1
II
II
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert
you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the unit is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating
instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions
should be followed.
5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near
water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen
sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming
pool, etc.
6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart
or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
6A A unit and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive
force, and uneven surfaces may cause the
unit and cart combination to overturn.
7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit
should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location
or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For
example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug,
or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or
placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet
that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation
openings.
9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources
such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce
heat.
10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power
supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or
as marked on the unit.
11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the unit.
12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be
unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long
period of time.
14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the
inside of the unit.
15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by
qualified service personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged;
or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
unit; or
C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or
D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.
16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit
beyond those means described in the operating instructions.
All other servicing should be referred to qualified service
personnel.
17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away
from power lines.
18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so
that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
I CAUTION
0101V620(UCA)_Cau_EN 1/16/1, 10:07 AM2
III
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
III
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the
FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this
product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC
Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,
if not installed and used according to the instructions
found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee
that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one
of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment
by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through
loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
19 For US customers only:
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is
connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is
grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage
surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to
an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC
– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installers attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
CAUTION II
0101V620(UCA)_Cau_EN 1/16/1, 10:07 AM3
IV
IV
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for
ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical
shock, do not place this unit where it may get
exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this
unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room
with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside
this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may
cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage
to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.
If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/
or liquid drops inside this unit.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage
BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
FREQUENCY STEP switch
(China and General models only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in
different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch
(locating at the rear) according to the frequency
spacing in your area.
North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power
plug of this unit from the AC outlet.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the
space below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owners Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
III CAUTION
0101V620(UCA)_Cau_EN 1/16/1, 10:07 AM4
1
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES............................................................ 2
GETTING STARTED........................................... 3
Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4
Front Panel ............................................................... 4
Remote Control ........................................................ 6
Description of the Numeric Buttons ........................ 7
Using the Remote Control........................................ 8
Front Panel Display .................................................. 9
Rear Panel .............................................................. 10
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11
Speakers to Be Used............................................... 11
Speaker Placement ................................................. 11
CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12
Before Connecting Components ............................ 12
Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12
Connecting an External Decoder ........................... 13
Connecting Video Components .............................. 14
Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 18
Connecting the Power Supply Cords ..................... 18
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 19
OSD Modes ............................................................ 19
Selecting the OSD Mode........................................ 19
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 20
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items
1A through 1E .................................................... 20
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS ........................................................... 21
Before You Begin ................................................... 21
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 21
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................... 23
Input Modes and Indications .................................. 25
Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 27
Normal Stereo Reproduction.................................. 28
TUNING............................................................... 29
Connecting the Antennas........................................ 29
Automatic (or Manual) Tuning .............................. 30
Presetting Stations .................................................. 31
Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 32
Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 33
BASIC RECORDING......................................... 34
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU .......................................................... 35
Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU................. 35
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings)........... 36
2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right
main speakers) ................................................... 38
3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 39
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 39
5 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 39
6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) .................. 40
7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ................................ 40
8 SP DELAY TIME............................................... 41
9 DISPLAY SET ................................................... 41
10MEMORY GUARD ........................................... 41
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS...................................................... 42
SLEEP TIMER.................................................... 43
Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 43
Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 43
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 44
Selector Dial ........................................................... 44
Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the
Selector Dial....................................................... 45
Controlling the Components Connected
to This Unit ........................................................ 45
Button Names and Functions in Each Position ...... 46
Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 49
Returning to the Factory Setting ............................ 50
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 51
Hi-Fi DSP Programs............................................... 51
CINEMA DSP Programs ........................................ 51
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER
EDITING ......................................................... 54
What is a sound field? ............................................ 54
Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 54
Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 55
Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 55
Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ...................... 56
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 59
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 64
GLOSSARY ......................................................... 65
INDEX .................................................................. 67
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM1
2
FEATURES
Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner
40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning
Automatic Preset Tuning
Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset
Editing)
Other Features
96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
“SET MENU” which Provides You with
10 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your
Audio/Video System
Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other
Future Formats
BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing
Bass Response
On Screen Display Function Helpful in
Controlling This Unit
S Video Signal Input/Output Capability
Component Video Input/Output Capability
Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks
Sleep Timer
Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases
when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control
is given in parentheses in this manual.
Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier
Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 )
Center: 100 W (8 )
Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 )
[Australia, Singapore, China and General
models]
Main: 90 W + 90 W (8 )
Center: 90 W (8 )
Rear: 90 W + 90 W (8 )
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
(10% THD, 1 kHz)
[China and General models]
Main: 115 W + 115 W (8 )
Center: 115 W (8 )
Rear: 115 W + 115 W (8 )
Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
DTS Decoder
Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
Dolby Digital Decoder
Hi-Fi DSP
CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby
Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and
pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM2
3
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Remote control
Installing Batteries in the Remote
Control
Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the
+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings
(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.
Notes on batteries
Change the batteries periodically.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check your package to make sure it has the following items.
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China and
General models)
AM loop antenna
Quick Reference Card
Changing batteries
As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the
remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash
or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these
conditions, change all of the batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have
been cleared.
Note
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.
Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into
contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment
thoroughly before installing new batteries.
1
2
3
A/B/C/D/E
Quick Reference Card
(Australia and
Singapore models)
Connection guide
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 1:41 PM3
4
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on or sets this unit in the standby mode. When you
turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a
4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
4 INPUT MODE
Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or
more types of signals to this unit (see page 25 for details).
You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH
INPUT as the input source.
5 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
6 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons on the remote control).
7 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF
When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass
frequency of the left and right main speakers by +6 dB
(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This
boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.
However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN
SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/
BASS OUT” is set to SWFR.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFFONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1 2
3
4
5
6
7 8
9
0
q
i
o
p
e
yu
r
t
w
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM4
5
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 BASS
Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right
main speakers.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the low-frequency response.
9 TREBLE
Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right
main speakers.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the high-frequency response.
Note
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and
right main speakers.
0 SPEAKERS A/B
When pushed in (ON), these buttons turn on the set of
main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on
the rear panel.
q EFFECT
Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off.
If you turn off the output of these speakers by using
EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except
for the LFE channel are directed to the main left and right
channels.
When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left
and right main channel signal levels may not match.
w DSP PROGRAM
Switches the function of the multi jog knob for selecting
DSP program.
e PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the speakers.
r Multi jog knob
Selects the tuning frequency in the tuning mode.
Selects the preset station after pressing PRESET/
TUNING (EDIT) to display “ z ” in the tuning mode.
Selects the DSP program after pressing DSP PROGRAM.
t VIDEO AUX jacks
Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
y PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of the multi jog knob between
selecting a preset station number and tuning.
This button is also used to exchange the assignment of
two preset stations with each other.
u FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (for
FM stations only).
o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.
To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so
that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel
display again. To select the manual tuning mode, press
this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light
up.
p INPUT l / h
Selects the input source (CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD,
D-TV/CBL, VCR 1, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR) you
want to listen to or watch.
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM5
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
TV POWER
EFFECT
e
r
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
q
w
0
t
y
u
i
o
Remote Control
This section describes the basic operation of this unit with
the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/
TUN position. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES”
for full details.
Select the
AMP/TUN
position.
1 DSP
Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP
program selector.
2 Indicator window
Shows the name of components which can be controlled.
3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons)
These buttons select the input source.
See “Description of the Numeric Buttons” for the
numeric buttons.
4 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
5 TEST
Outputs the test tone.
6 ON SCREEN
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor.
7 j / i (–/+)
Adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items.
–/+ is displayed on the on-screen display.
8 LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel (center, rear and
subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level
independently.
9 SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
0 INPUT
Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the input
selector.
q Indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
w Selector dial
Turn this dial to select the position for the component to
be controlled. (The proper code must be set up for your
component. See “Setting the Manufacture Codes”.) When
a position is selected, the remote control is set to that
component operation mode.
e A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+
These buttons are used to select a preset station.
A/B/C/D/E: To select one of 5 preset station groups (A
to E)
PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)
r u/d
Select DSP program parameters and SET MENU items.
t SET MENU
Enters the SET MENU.
y POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
u STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM6
7
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
A
B
i VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
o MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output
to the previous volume level.
EFFECT
Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off
in the following cases:
When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position.
While the indicator is lit for about 3 seconds after
pressing DSP.
Description of the Numeric
Buttons
The numeric buttons function in various ways depending
on the position of the selector dial or the combination of
other instructions.
When selecting an input source
Input selector
buttons
1 Press INPUT regardless of the position of
the selector dial.
The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds.
2 You can select an input source with the
numeric buttons and 6CH INPUT while the
indicator is lit.
When selecting a DSP program
and turning on or off the effect
speakers (center and rear)
DSP program
group buttons
A
1 Press DSP regardless of the position of the
selector dial.
The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds.
2 You can select a DSP program with the
numeric buttons and turn on or off the effect
speakers (center and rear) by pressing
EFFECT while the indicator is lit.
B
1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN
position.
2 You can select a DSP program directly with
the numeric buttons and turn on or off the
effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing
EFFECT.
6CH INPUT
EFFECT
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM7
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
When selecting a preset station
number
1 Set code number “0023” in the AMP/TUN (or
DSP/TUN) position.
See “Setting the Manufacturer Code” for setting the
code.
2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or
DSP/TUN) position.
3 You can select a preset station number
directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8).
See “Tuning in to a Preset Station”.
Using the Remote Control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
Handling the remote control
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
dusty places; or
in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
DIGITAL
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
30° 30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM8
9
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel Display
1 t indicator
Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on.
2 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.
3 g and o indicators
Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit
is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the built-
in Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up
when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.
4 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with a cursor.
5 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.
6 STEREO indicator
Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.
7 AUTO indicator
Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
8 MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
9 x indicator
Lights up when you select a DSP program.
0 v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
q Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
w DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
e Multi-information display
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
r VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
t SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
dB
ms
PCM
DSP
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
A
SP
B
VIRTUAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC DTS
MOVIE THEATER 1
2
ENTERTAINMENT
TUNED
STEREO AUTO
MEMORY
SLEEP
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
1 2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
0 q
w
e
r t
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM9
10
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Rear Panel
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
3 GND terminal
See page 12 for connection information.
4 6CH INPUT jacks
See page 13 for connection information.
5 Antenna input terminals
See page 29 for connection information.
6 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.
7 Speaker terminals
See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.
8 AC power cord
Connect to a power outlet.
9 AC OUTLET(S)
Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/
video components (see page 18).
0 Audio component jacks
See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.
q SUBWOOFER jack
See page 17 for connection information.
w IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your
speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode
before you change the setting of this switch (see page 18).
China and General models only
FREQUENCY STEP switch
See page 29.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 18.
1
2
4 5
6 7
8 9
q w
0
3
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER
+
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+ ––+
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YPB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
(U.S.A. model)
0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM10
11
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers to Be Used
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right
main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center
speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with
different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not
shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers
from the same manufacturer to ensure even tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound
plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers
from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are
used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center
speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If
for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker,
you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained
with the full system.
The main speakers should be high-performance models
and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other
speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers.
For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use
high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over
the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.
Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when
the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.
The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Main
speaker (L)
Center speaker
Main speaker (R)
Rear speaker (R)
Rear speaker (L)
1.8 m
Main speakers
Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet)
above the floor.
Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will
be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE.
Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall
reflections.
CAUTION
Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes
a video monitor may be adversely affected even when
magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the
speakers from the monitor if this happens.
PREPARATION
Subwoofer
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM11
12
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions
for each component to be connected to this unit.
When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or
changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc.
After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
Connecting Audio Components
Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of
digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to
both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given
to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
y
You can designate the input for each digital jack according to
your component by using “4 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET
MENU.
About the dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack
before you connect the fiber optic cable.
Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the
cap back in place. This cap protects the
jack from dust.
Note
The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It
simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may
hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal.
Connecting a CD player
y
The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has a
coaxial digital output jack.
When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital
jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack.
Connecting an MD recorder, CD
recorder or tape deck
y
When you connect your recording component to both the
analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given
to the digital signal.
Notes
When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its
power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit
may distort the sound from other components.
Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are
independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to
the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the
digital jack.
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM12
13
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YP
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
L R
L R
L
R
C
L
R
L
R
OO
L R
OUTPUT
GND
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
MAIN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
L
R
C
O
MD recorder
or CD recorder
indicates signal direction
indicates coaxial cables
CD player
Turntable
External decoder
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
(U.S.A. model)
Connecting an External Decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left
and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND
and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from
an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot listen to DSP programs.
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing
items 1A to 1E on the SET MENU is not affected.
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM13
14
CONNECTIONS
YPB/CB PR/CR
Connecting Video Components
About the video jacks
There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composit video
signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.
The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) video signals. The jacks are also separated
into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component
(e.g. Y, C
B
, C
R
/Y, P
B
, P
R
/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.
If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the
S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks
on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO jack (composite)
S VIDEO jack
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
y
Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input
through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are
output through the corresponding composite video, S-video,
and component jacks, respectively.
If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary
to make composite video connections. If both types of
connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video
signal.
You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A
and B jacks according to your component by using “4 I/O
ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU.
Notes
Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when
connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owners manual that came with the component being
connected.
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
These jacks are used to connect any video input source
such as a game console to this unit.
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL OUT
S VIDEO OUT
O
V
L
R
S
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
Game console
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM14
15
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YPB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
V
V
S VIDEO
INPUT
S
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
R
S
L
R
L
R
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUTAUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
V
S
O
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
L
R
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
V
S
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
S
V
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
COMPONENT
INPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
S
R
V
O
DVD player
TV/digital TV or
cable TV/satellite
tuner
VCR 1 or VCR 2/
DVR (digital video
recorder)
(U.S.A. model)
indicates signal direction
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
indicates video cables
indicates S-video cables
Monitor
When using an LD player
Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack.
If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog
jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3),
use a commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack.
If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the
analog input jack (D-TV/CBL, VCR 1 or VCR 2/DVR). For details on connections and operations, refer to the
instruction manual for the LD player.
Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer
code for the DVD/LD position.
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/17/1, 4:38 PM15
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the Speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage the unit and/or speakers.
If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers
in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.
Speaker cables
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One of the cables is colored or
shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable
together to prevent short circuits.
12
Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
2
1
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either
of the MAIN A or B terminals.
REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
10 mm (3/8”)
y
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only)
Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of
the corresponding terminal.
Banana plug
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM16
17
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER
+
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
––
+
V
D
ITOR
U
T
V
/CBL
C
OMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
Main speakers A
Right Left
Main speakers B
Right
Left
(U.S.A. model)
Center speaker Rear speakers
Right Left
Subwoofer
system
SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier,
including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the
subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals
distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are
directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is
90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated
when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed
if they are assigned to this jack.
Notes
Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operating
instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible
using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.)
Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “6 DOLBY
D. SET” and “7 DTS SET” on the SET MENU, some signals
may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.
0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 1/16/1, 11:19 AM17
CONNECTIONS
18
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit
may be damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may
not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby
mode.
Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch
only when this unit is in the standby mode.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
MAINS
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
(U.S.A. model)
(General model)
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
To AC outlet
Connecting the Power Supply Cords
After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if
you will not use this unit for a long period of time.
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and
General models ............................................2 OUTLETS
Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from
your audio/video components to this unit. The power to
the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s
STANDBY/ON (or POWER and STANDBY). These
outlets will supply power to any connected component
whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power
(total power consumption of components) that can be
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher.
SWITCHED
Switch
position
Speaker Impedance level
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 W or higher.
Center
The impedance must be 6 or higher.
Rear
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 or higher.
Right
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 W or higher.
[Canada model only]
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 W or higher.
Left
Center
The impedance must be 8 or higher.
Rear
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 1/16/1, 11:20 AM18
19
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)
Full display Short display
You can display the operation information for this unit on
a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP
program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier
to see the available options and parameters than it is by
reading this information on the front panel display.
y
If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is
superimposed over the image.
The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded with any video signal.
You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when
a video source is not being reproduced (or the source
component is turned off) by using “9 DISPLAY SET” on the
SET MENU.
OSD Modes
You can change the amount of information the OSD
shows.
Full display
This mode always shows the DSP program parameter
settings on the video monitor.
Short display
This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front
panel display at the bottom of the screen and then
disappears.
Display off
This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message
at the bottom of the screen and then disappears.
Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the
monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button.
P01 CONCERT HALL
INIT. DLY
45ms
ROOM SIZE 1.0
LIVENESS
5
P01 CONCERT HALL
y
When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,
VOLUME and some other types of operation information are
displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that
for the front panel display.
The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the
OSD mode.
Selecting the OSD Mode
1 When you turn on the power, the video
monitor and front panel display show the
level of the main volume for a few seconds
and then switch to show the current DSP
program.
2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control
repeatedly to change the display mode.
The OSD mode changes in the following order: full
display, short display, and display off.
Notes
If you choose a video input source that has a component
connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN
jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO
OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is
output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.
However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no
video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video
and composite video signals.
If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to
connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see
the OSD.
Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or
video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.
0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 1/16/1, 11:20 AM19
20
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS
This unit is equipped with a main amplifier capable of handling 5.1 channel. Although up to 6 speakers can be
connected, it is possible to select the speaker mode that gives the best sound field effect according to the number and
size of speakers being used.
Before use, please set the speaker mode setting using “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU described on page 36.
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E
1A CENTER SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is
being used and its performance.
LRG/SML/NONE
1B MAIN SP
Item Description
Control value (default
setting indicated in bold)
Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main
speakers.
LARGE/SMALL
1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers
are being used and their performance.
LRG/SML/NONE
1D LFE/BASS OUT
Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass
signal.
SWFR/MAIN/BOTH
1E MAIN LEVEL
Selects the main speaker level.
Normal/–10 dB
0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 1/16/1, 11:20 AM20
21
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
This section explains how to adjust the speaker output
levels by using the test tone generator. When this
adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound
field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby
Digital decoder and DTS decoder.
Note
Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Before You Begin
1 Press STANDBY/ON to
turn on the power. Turn on
the video monitor.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of the
main speakers, press both A
and B.
3 Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to
the center position and set BASS
EXTENSION to OFF.
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY
SUR.)
The adjustment of each speaker output level should be
made at your listening position with the remote control.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press TEST to output the test tone.
3 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test
tone.
The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,
center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker
and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced
for 2.5 seconds each time.
BASS TREBLE
+ +
LEFT SURROUND
(TEST L SUR.)
RIGHT SURROUND
(TEST R SUR.)
CENTER
(TEST CENTER)
RIGHT
(TEST RIGHT)
LEFT
(TEST LEFT)
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1
3
3
2
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2,6
5
4
1
3
OFFON
BASS
EXTENSION
Set to OFF.
STANDBY
/ON
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 1/16/1, 11:20 AM21
22
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
The state of the test tone output is also shown on the
monitor by an image of the audio listening room.
This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.
y
If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
center channel sound is automatically output from the left and
right main speakers.
Note
If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the
unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
4 Press LEVEL repeatedly
to select the speaker to be
adjusted.
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker to be
adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in
the reverse order.)
5 Press j / i repeatedly to
adjust the output level of
the currently selected
speaker so that it
becomes almost the same
as that of the main
speaker.
While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the
selected speaker.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the output levels of
the center, left rear and right rear speakers.
6 When the adjustment is complete, press
TEST.
The test tone stops and the
current DSP program appears
on the front panel display and
on the video monitor.
Notes
For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, see the effect
speaker level adjustment described on page 42.
After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the
speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an
actual source when using the effect speaker level adjustment
described on page 42.
y
You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers
(center, left rear and right rear) to +10 dB. If the output level of
these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even
after you have increased the output level of these speakers up
to +10 dB, set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to
–10 dB. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to
about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E
MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the
levels for the center and rear speakers again.
TEST DOLBY SUR.
LEFT
0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 1/16/1, 11:20 AM22
23
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one
of the input selector buttons) to select the
input source.
The current input source is indicated on the front
panel display with a cursor.
The current input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display and on the video
monitor for a few seconds.
Front panel
or
Remote control
Selected input source
BASIC OPERATION
When using the remote control, set the selector dial to
the AMP/TUN position.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of
main speakers, press both A
and B.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn on
the power. Turn on the video monitor.
The front panel display and the video monitor show
the level of the main volume for a few seconds and
then switch to show the current DSP program.
Select this: To reproduce the signal from
this component
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
6
3
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+ +
SURROUND
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/ON
1
3
56
5
2
Front panel
Remote controlFront panel
or
STANDBY
/ON
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
PHONO: Turntable
CD: CD player
TUNER: AM/FM tuner
MD/CD-R: MD recorder/CD recorder/tape deck
DVD: DVD player
D-TV/CBL: TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite
tuner
VCR 1: Video cassette deck 1
VCR 2/DVR: Video cassette deck 2/digital
video recorder
V-AUX: Another audio/video component
(connected to the VIDEO AUX
jacks on the front panel)
0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM23
24
BASIC PLAYBACK
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
PCM
To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks
Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the
front panel display and on the video monitor.
Notes
If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on
the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector
buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the
front panel display and the video monitor.
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press 6CH INPUT.
4 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
5 Adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
or
Front panel
Note
If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR
OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced
sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these
cases, turn on the component.
6 Use the digital sound field processor.
See “Selecting a Sound Field Program”.
Front panel
or
Remote control
To mute the sound
Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio
output.
Press MUTE on the
remote control.
To restore the audio output to
the previous volume level,
press MUTE again.
y
You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as
VOLUME +/–.
During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel
display and on the video monitor.
When you have finished using
this unit
Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set
this unit in the standby mode.
Notes on the digital signal
The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and
set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation
instructions for the player.) Note the following when a
96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
1. The following indication will appear on the front panel
display.
2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be
output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the
left and right main speakers.
Note
If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1D LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the
subwoofer.
3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on
page 42 cannot be made.
VOLUME
BASS TREBLE
+ +
OFFON
BASS
EXTENSION
Front panel Remote control
DSP
PROGRAM
or
6CH INPUT
Front Panel
Remote control
If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS
EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective
for sound from the main speakers.
0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM24
25
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
INPUT MODE
BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
(For example, you can listen to classical music while you
are watching a video.)
Select a source from the video group and then select a
source from the audio group with the input selector
buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does
not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on
the front panel.
Input Modes and Indications
When using the remote control, set the selector dial to
the AMP/TUN position.
This unit comes with various input jacks. If your
component is connected to more than one type of input
jack, you can set the priority of the input signal.
Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control)
repeatedly until the desired input mode is
shown on the front panel display and on the
video monitor.
Front panel
or
Remote control
Input mode
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is
automatically selected in the
following order:
1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal
2) Digital (PCM) signal
3) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input
signal encoded with DTS is
selected even if another signal is
input at the same time.
ANLG (ANALOG): In this mode, only the analog input
signal is selected even if a digital
signal is input at the same time.
Notes
If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is
selected.
When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source.
The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and
DVD players in the following situation:
When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is
performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when
playback is resumed.
Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when
playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input
mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to
ANALOG.
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM25
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
Notes on playing a source
encoded with a DTS signal
If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to
perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital
connection between this unit and the player.
If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and
set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces
the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you
want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the
source to a digital input jack and set the input mode
to AUTO or DTS.
If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
The following phenomena may occur if the input
mode is set to AUTO when playing back source
encoded with a DTS.
If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS
signal this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-
decoding” mode to prevent noise from being
generated during subsequent operation. (The “t
indicator lights up on the front panel display.) The
t” indicator may flash immediately after
playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has
finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal
can be played back while this indicator is flashing.
(The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If
you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the
input mode back to AUTO.
The “t” indicator may flash when a search or
skip operation is performed. If this status continues
for a certain length of time, the unit will
automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding”
mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the
t” indicator will go out.
0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM26
27
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
Selecting a Sound Field Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. For details about each program, see
“SOUND FIELD PROGRAM”.
On the remote control
1 Press DSP.
The indicator lights up for
about 3 seconds.
A/B/C/D/E
1
2
y
If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, skip this
step.
2 Use the numeric buttons to select the
desired program before the indicator goes
off.
For example, to select the sub-program
“SPECTACLE”, press MOVIE THEATER 1
repeatedly.
The name of the selected program appears on the
front panel display and on the video monitor.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
21
DSP
DIGITAL
MOVIE THEATER 1
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
Program group
Program name (sub-program)
On the front panel
1 Press DSP PROGRAM.
2 Turn the multi jog knob to
select the program.
The name of the selected
program appears on the front
panel display and on the video
monitor.
Notes
Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and
not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening
room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections
in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically
selected when you turn on the power again.
If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode
is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the
appropriate decoding program.
When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be
heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can
only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A
CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center
channel sound is output from the main speakers.
When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit
is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the
DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is
reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.
DSP
PROGRAM
0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM27
28
BASIC PLAYBACK
EFFECT
Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT
CINEMA
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field
effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using
YAMAHA original technology, natural surround
reproduction is possible through the generation of a
virtual speaker.
The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on
the SET MENU to NONE. Virtual CINEMA DSP is
performed by using the main speakers.
Note
This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:
when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY
DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected;
when the sound effect is turned off;
when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;
when using the test tone; or
when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT
CINEMA).
SILENT CINEMA
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel
of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature
delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if
listening through the speakers.
You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your
headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect
speakers are on.
Front panel
or
Remote control
y
If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN
position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote
control.
Notes
If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the
center and rear speakers.
If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.
The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effect or if you set “6 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to
MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
Normal Stereo Reproduction
Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect
for normal stereo reproduction.
Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back
on.
0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM28
29
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
Connecting the Antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.
Connecting the indoor FM
antenna
Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT
75 UNBAL. terminal.
Note
Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM
antenna at the same time.
5
4
Antenna stand
1
2
3
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
AM loop
antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference, connect
the antenna GND terminal to a
good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General
models only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing
differs in different areas, set the
FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at
the rear) according to the frequency
spacing in your area.
North, Central and South America:
100 kHz/10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the
AC power plug of this unit from the AC
outlet.
100
K
H
Z
/10
K
H
Z
50
K
H
Z
/9
K
H
Z
FM/AM
FREQUENCY
STEP
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal
hole.
2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into
the AM ANT and GND terminals.
3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.
Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good
connection.
4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna
stand.
5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best
reception is obtained.
y
The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and
attached to a wall, etc.
Notes
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer
reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the
quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA
dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.
(U.S.A. model)
0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 1/16/1, 11:14 AM29
30
TUNING
y
Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not
stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.
When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up
and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front
panel display.
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune in to it manually.
1 Press INPUT l / h to
select TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
If “ z ” appears on the front panel display next to the
band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn it off.
INPUT
4 Turn the multi jog knob to the right or left to
begin automatic tuning.
Turn the multi jog knob to the
right for tuning in to a higher
frequency, or to the left for
tuning in to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob again if the
tuning search does not stop at
the desired station.
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Goes off
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
Turn “ z off.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
4
23
1
Automatic (or Manual) Tuning
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Press INPUT l / h to
select TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
or
FM/AM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
Turn “ z off.
INPUT
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from
the front panel display.
If “ z ” appears on the front panel display next to the
band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn it off.
FM/AM
or
4 Turn the multi jog knob to
the right or left to tune in
to the desired sration
manually.
Note
Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change
the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.
0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 1/16/1, 11:15 AM30
31
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”
indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds,
automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency
currently displayed toward the higher frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO
FM/AM
Presetting Stations
Automatically presetting stations
(for FM stations)
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables the unit to
automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those
stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in
to any preset station by selecting the preset station
number (see “Tuning in to a Preset Station”).
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
Notes
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.
You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or
AM station by simply following the procedure in the section
“Manually presetting stations”.
If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually
in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure
in “Manually presetting stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which the unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after
pressing MEMORY in step 3):
1. Turn the multi jog knob to select the preset number
under which the first station will be stored. Automatic
preset tuning will stop when stations have all been
stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off “ z ” and
then turn the multi jog knob to the left to begin tuning
toward lower frequencies.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
Lights up
MEMORY
VOLUME
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
AUTO
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1
32
0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 1/16/1, 11:15 AM31
32
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5
groups) manually.
1 Tune in to a station.
See “Automatic (or Manual) Tuning” for tuning
instructions.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about
5 seconds.
Flashes
3 Turn the multi jog knob to select a preset
station number while the “MEMORY”
indicator is flashing.
Turn the multi jog knob to the
right to select a higher preset
station number, and to the left
to select a lower preset station
number.
4 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the
“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear on the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
Shows the displayed station has been stored as A1.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to store other stations.
Notes
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2,4
3
A/B/C/D/E
3
2
1
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Tuning in to a Preset Station
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
On the remote control
1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN
position and press TUNER to select TUNER
as the input source.
2 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.
3 Press PRESET –/+ to select a preset station
number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.
y
You can select the preset station number with the numeric
buttons (1 to 8) if code number “0023” has been set up in the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position.
TUNED
STEREO
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
AUTO
TUNED
STEREO
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
AUTO
0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 1/16/1, 11:15 AM32
33
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
Exchanging Preset Stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Tune in to preset station “E1”.
See “Tuning in to a Preset Station”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the
buttons on the front panel.
“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORY
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
MEMORY
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
MEMORY
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
Shows the exchange of stations
has been completed.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+ +
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2,4
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+ +
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2
1
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
TUNED
STEREO
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
AUTO
On the front panel
1 Press PRESET/TUNING
(EDIT) so that z next to
the band indicator
appears.
2 Turn the multi jog knob to
select tne desired preset
station number.
The preset group and number
appear on the front panel
display along with the station
band, frequency, and the
“TUNED” indicator lights up.
0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 1/16/1, 11:15 AM33
34
BASIC RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power to the unit and all
connected component.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
Front panel
or
Remote control
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Notes
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,
VOLUME, “2 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP
programs does not affect the recorded material.
A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot
be recorded.
S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal by your VCR.
A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS
Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded.
Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the
players operation instructions so that the audio signals
are output from the players analog outputs.
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
2
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORYEFFECT
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2
0107V620(UCA)_34_EN 1/16/1, 11:15 AM34
35
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Adjusting the Items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to
10) you want to adjust.
y
By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing d.
4 Press j or i once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the video
monitor or on the front panel display.
SET MENU
ADVANCED OPERATION
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
3,6
4,5
1
2
The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the
speaker mode setting features. Use the SET MENU to
enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system.
y
You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU
while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video
monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit
while adjusting the items.
Note
The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of
the OSD.
1 SPEAKER SET
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
1D LFE/BASS OUT
1E MAIN LEVEL
2 L/R BALANCE
3 HP TONE CTRL
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
4B OPTICAL OUT
4C OPTICAL IN
4D COAXIAL IN
5 INPUT MODE
6 DOLBY D. SET
LFE LEVEL
D-RANGE
7 DTS SET
8 SP DELAY TIME
9 DISPLAY SET
BLUE BACK
OSD SHIFT
DIMMER
10 MEMORY GUARD
SET MENU 1/3
1 SPEAKER SET
2 L/R BALANCE
3 HP TONE CTRL
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
: Up/Down/
–/+ : Enter
SET MENU 1/3
1 SPEAKER SET
2 L/R BALANCE
3 HP TONE CTRL
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
: Up/Down/
–/+ : Enter
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL
[A] • • • • • DVD
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM35
36
SET MENU
Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub
item.
5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting
of the item.
6 Press u/d repeatedly until the current DSP
program appears or simply press one of the
DSP program group button to exit from the
SET MENU.
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
level adjustments in items 1B and 1D are possible, but those in
items 1A,1C and 1E are not affected.
When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.
1A CENTER SP (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
the unit can provide good dialog localization for many
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center
speaker depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS
OUT”.
1A CENTER SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1A CENTER SP
LRG
SML
NONE
or
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you
adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust
the items again.
4B OPTICAL OUT
(1) • • • • • MD/CD-R
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL
[A] • • • • • VCR 1
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM36
37
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker
mode)
The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers
depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
left and right rear speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D
LFE/BASS OUT”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting
NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signals are directed to the left and right
main speakers.
1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)
The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending
on how you set this item.
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Initial setting: LARGE
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire
range of the left and right main channel signal is directed
to the left and right main speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS
OUT”.
Note
When you select MAIN for “1D LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are
directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the
main speaker mode.
1A CENTER SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1B MAIN SP
LARGE
SMALL
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1B MAIN SP
LARGE
SMALL
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM37
38
SET MENU
1D LFE/BASS OUT (bass out
mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
Initial setting: BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE
signals are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix
the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE
signals.
Notes
When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video
cassette etc.), select the BOTH position to direct low bass
signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack.
When you select SMALL (SML) for items 1A, 1B and 1C, the
low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels
are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer.
1D LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR
MAIN BOTH
1D LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR
MAIN BOTH
1E MAIN LEVEL (main level
mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers
because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of
the main speakers.
Choices: Normal, –10 dB
Initial setting: Normal
Normal
Normally select this setting.
–10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when
using the test tone. This setting decreases the main
speaker output level to about one-third of the normal
level.
2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
left and right main speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the left and right main speakers.
Control range: 10 for L/R
Initial setting: 0
Press i to decrease the output level for the
left main speaker. Press j for the right main
speaker.
Note
The L/R BALANCE setting also applies to when headphones
are being used.
1E MAIN LEVEL
Normal
–10dB
1E MAIN LEVEL
Normal
–10dB
1D LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR
MAIN BOTH
2 L/R BALANCE
L
• • • • • • • • • •
I
I
• • • • • • • • • •
R
0
: Exit/
–/+ : Adjust
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM38
39
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone
tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB): –6 to +3
Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack
or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component
names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes
it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively
connect more component.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons).
4A CMPNT-V INPUT (for the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks)
Initial settings: [A] DVD
[B] D-TV/CBL
4B OPTICAL OUT (for the
OPTICAL OUTPUT jack)
Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R
4C OPTICAL IN (for the OPTICAL
INPUT jacks)
Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R
(3) DVD
(4) D-TV/CBL
4D COAXIAL IN (for the COAXIAL
INPUT jack)
Initial setting: (5) CD
Note
You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
5 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning
on the power with the source component connected to
more than one type of the input jacks.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Initial setting: AUTO
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for that source.
3 HP TONE CTRL
BASS
TRBL
+
0dB
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL
[A] • • • • • DVD
4B OPTICAL OUT
(1) • • • • • MD/CD-R
4C OPTICAL IN
(2) • • • • • MD/CD-R
(4) • • • • • D-TV/CBL
(3) • • • • • DVD
4D COAXIAL IN
(5) • • • • • CD
5 INPUT MODE
AUTO LAST
: Exit
/
–/+ : Select
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM39
40
SET MENU
6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital
set)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes
Dolby Digital signals.
LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-
frequency special effect sound which is only added to
certain scenes.
Control value (dB): –20 to 0
Initial setting: 0 dB
Notes
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer.
Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening
at home.
D-RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the
difference between the maximum level and the minimum
level of sounds).
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN
Initial setting: MAX
Select MAX for feature films.
Select STD for general use.
Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely
low volume level.
L-LEVEL BST
H-LEVEL CUT
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
MAX
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
STD
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
MIN
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
Note
When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because
some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the
minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or
STD.
7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS
signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS
signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special
effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.
Control range (dB): –10 to +10
Initial setting: 0 dB
Note
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer.
7 DTS SET
LFE LEVEL • • • • 0dB
: Exit/
–/+ : Adjust
6 DOLBY D. SET
: Select/
–/+ : Adjust
LFE LEVEL
0dB
D-RANGE
• • •
MAX
STD
MIN
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM40
41
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
8 SP DELAY TIME
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should
be the same distance from the listening position as the left
and right main speakers. However, in most home
situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the
main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center
speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to
the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the
same as the distance between the left and right main
speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay
time for the center speaker is especially important for
giving depth to the dialog.
Control range (ms): 0 to 5
Initial setting: 0 ms
Center speaker image
y
Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of
the center speaker.
8 SP DELAY TIME
: Exit/
–/+ : Adjust
CENTER • • • • • • 0ms
9 DISPLAY SET
BLUE BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a blue background when there’s no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-
screen display.
Initial setting: AUTO
OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)
This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the
OSD.
Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
Initial setting: 0
Press i to lower the position of the OSD.
Press j to raise the position of the OSD.
DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
10 MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other settings on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Initial setting: OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
DSP program parameters
All SET MENU items
Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels
The on-screen display (OSD) mode
Notes
When “10 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone.
When “10 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select
any other SET MENU items.
9 DISPLAY SET
BLUE BACK
• • • AUTO
DIMMER • • • • • • • • • • 0
OSD SHIFT • • • • • • 0
10 MEMORY GUARD
OFF ON
: Exit
/
–/+ : Select
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM41
42
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
1
3
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening
to a music source.
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display and
on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,
left rear and subwoofer.
CENTER
R SUR.
L SUR.
SWFR
Center speaker output level
Right rear speaker output
level
Left rear speaker output
level
Subwoofer output level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection
in the reverse order.)
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range for the center or left and right
rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB
to –20 dB.
Notes
If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of
that speaker cannot be adjusted.
• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
• For details on adjusting speakers other than the subwoofer, the
adjusting procedure using the test tone on page 21 is
recommended.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the output level of the effect speakers
you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so,
adjust the output level again.
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM42
43
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
3
SLEEP TIMER
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer
also automatically turns off the external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.
Setting the Sleep Timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Set the selector dial to a
position other than the TV
position.
3 Press SLEEP repeatedly
to set the amount of time
before this unit
automatically turns off.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the
front panel display after the sleep timer has
been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the Sleep Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the
“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control
(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the
AC power cord from the AC outlet.
DSP
DIGITAL
SLEEP
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
120 90 60 30
The SLEEP timer is off
(SLEEP OFF).
(This is the state before
SLEEP is pressed.)
DSP
DIGITAL
SLEEP
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM43
44
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit.
It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the
proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component).
Note
For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer each description in this manual.
Selector Dial
Select the component (position) controlled by the remote control. For example, if the CD position is selected, the
remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. When turning the selector dial,
the position changes as follows:
Notes
The general operational buttons on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. See the following pages
for details.
When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 50 are set for each dial position. If unable to
operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code.
Selector
dial
AMP/TUN
You can perform the basic operations
of this unit.
CD
The code for a YAMAHA CD
player is factory-set.
CBL/SAT
A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.
VCR
A VCR can be controlled.
TV
A TV can be controlled.
TAPE/MD
The code for a YAMAHA MD recorder is
factory-set. Be sure to set the proper code when
operating a CD recorder or tape deck.
DVD/LD & DVD MENU
An LD player can be controlled in
the DVD/LD position. A DVD player
can be controlled in the DVD/LD
and DVD MENU positions. The
code for a YAMAHA DVD player is
factory-set.
DSP/TUN
This unit can be controlled and DSP
programs can be selected directly.
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:11 AM44
45
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
2
1
3
5
4
@
#
!
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
5
4
1
3
6
Commonly Used Buttons in Any
Position of the Selector Dial
Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can
control this unit and your TV with the following buttons.
Note
You have to set up the code for your TV in the TV position
before you can control the TV.
Controlling this unit
See “Remote Control”.
1 STANDBY
2 POWER
3 VOLUME +/–
4 SLEEP
Note
If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial
to the TV position, this button is used to set the sleep timer for
the TV.
5 MUTE
Note
If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial
to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound.
Controlling your TV
! TV POWER
@ TV INPUT
# TV VOLUME +/–
Controlling the Components
Connected to This Unit
The example below describes the procedure for
controlling a YAMAHA CD player.
1 Set the selector dial to the
CD position.
2 Turn on the power.
3 Press INPUT.
The indicator lights up for
about 3 seconds.
4 Press CD while the
indicator is lit.
5 Press p.
See “Button Names and
Functions in Eash Position”
for the CD player operation
buttons.
6 Adjust the volume.
If you set the remote control with the manufacturer
codes listed from page i at the end of this
manual, you can control other brands of components.
See “Setting the Manufacturer Codes” for details.
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM45
46
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Button Names and Functions in Each Position
TAPE/MD position (tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder)
Select the TAPE/MD position.
r Rec/Pause (tape/MD)
e Pause (MD/CD-R)
p Play
b DIR A (tape)
This button selects the playing direction of deck A.
Skip – (MD/CD-R)
w Rewind (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R)
INDEX (CD-R)
+10 (MD/CD-R)
Deck A/B (tape)
This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette
tape deck.
DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)
a DIR B (tape)
This button selects the playing direction of
deck B.
Skip + (MD/CD-R)
s Stop
f Fast forward (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
AV POWER
This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for
another manufacturer.
CD position
Select the CD position.
DISC SKIP –/+
(for a CD player with CD changer)
p Play
b Skip –
w Search
Numeric buttons
INDEX
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop
a Skip +
s Stop
YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop
f Search
AV POWER
This button turns on the CD player that has a remote
control with a power button if you have set up the
code for another manufacturer.
y Pause/Stop function
Press the button once to give a
pause in operation and press
once more to stop operation.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote
control supplied with your component.
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM46
47
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DVD/LD position
Select the DVD/LD position.
DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD)
p Play
b Skip – (DVD)
Skip/Chapter – (LD)
w Search
Numeric buttons
INDEX/Time (DVD)
Chapter/Time (LD)
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
a Skip + (DVD)
Skip/Chapter + (LD)
s Stop
f Search
AV POWER
(DVD) This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.
(LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.
DVD MENU position
Note
DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.
Select the DVD MENU position.
DISC SKIP –/+
Return
Menu select
Menu left
TITLE
Numeric buttons
INDEX
+10
DISPLAY
Menu up
Menu right
Menu down
MENU
AV POWER
This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up
the code for another manufacturer.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote
control supplied with your component.
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM47
48
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
VCR position
Select the VCR
position.
VCR REC
Press this button
twice to start
recording.
p Play
w Rewind
Numeric
buttons
Ch enter/Recall
_/_ _
CH –/+
DISPLAY
e Pause
s Stop
f
Fast forward
AV POWER
This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power
button if you have set up the code for your VCR.
CBL/SAT position
Select the CBL/SAT
position.
CH –/+
Menu select
Menu left
Recall
Numeric buttons
Ch enter
_/_ _
DISPLAY/
Guide (SAT)
Menu up
Menu right
Menu down
MENU
AV POWER
This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote
control with a power button if you have set up the code for your cable
TV/satellite tuner.
TV position
Note
You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for it in the VCR position.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote
control supplied with your component.
A/B/C/D/E
Select the TV
position.
VCR REC
Press this button twice.
p VCR play
w VCR rewind
TV POWER
This button turns on a TV that has a
remote control with a power button if
you have set up the code for your TV.
TV VOL +/–
TV INPUT
Numeric buttons
Ch enter/Recall
_/_ _
CH –/+
DISPLAY
e VCR pause
s VCR stop
f
VCR fast forward
VCR power
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM48
49
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting the Manufacturer Code
You can set up the code for the manufacturer of your
component in each position of the selector dial.
1 Turn on your component to be used.
2 Set the selector dial to the
desired position for the
component (TAPE/MD, CD,
DVD/LD, etc.).
3 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons
to enter the four-digit
manufacturer code for the
component to be used.
Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash
or flashes rapidly several
times, repeat step 3 and re-
enter the code.
5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to
check if you have set up the code correctly.
If your component cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another
code for the same
manufacturer.
Notes
You can set up only one code for one position.
In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions:
Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before
entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set up
the code for a DVD player when the selector dial is set to the
DVD MENU position. The code set up in the DVD/LD
position is also simultaneously set up in the DVD MENU
position.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed
for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied
with your component.
To use a second (and third) VCR
You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/
SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV/satellite
tuner or DVD player is not being used.
Note
In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU
position, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player
in the DVD/LD position.
1 Turn on the VCR to be used.
2 Set the selector dial to the
CBL/SAT or DVD MENU
position.
3 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons
to enter the four-digit
code for the second (and
third) VCR. Make sure that
the indicator flashes
twice.
If the indicator does not flash
or flashes rapidly several
times, repeat step 3 and re-
enter the code.
5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to
check if you have set up the code correctly.
If the VCR cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another
code for the same
manufacturer.
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM49
50
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Returning to the Factory Setting
To return to the factory-set codes
in all positions
1 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
2 Enter the code number “9990”.
Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.
To return to the factory-set codes
in each position
1 Set the selector dial to the
position for the
component to be returned
to the factory setting.
2 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number “0000”.
Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.
Selector dial position Component Code
The following codes are factory set.
Set component
Set code
TV TV 0101
CBL/SAT Cable TV 0006
VCR VCR 0002
DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)
CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)
TAPE/MD MD recorder 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder)
We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above.
0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM50
51
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to
play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to.
Note
Regardless of the program name and features listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you.
Hi-Fi DSP Programs
For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Note
Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output.
The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source
encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the
input source.)
CINEMA DSP Programs
For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
1 CONCERT HALL
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections
from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great
deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.
2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York
jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field
offering a real and vibrant sound.
3 ROCK CONCERT
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was
recorded at LAs “hottest” rock club. The listeners virtual seat is at the center-left
of the hall.
4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a
big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a
high-energy, “immediate” sound.
5CH STEREO
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field
suitable for background music at parties.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old
movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth
by using only the presence sound field.
Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field
employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you
can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music
programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the
commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the
atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the
rear is properly restrained.
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
4 ENTERTAINMENT GAME
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
6 MONO MOVIE
5 TV SPORTS
0110V620(UCA)_51-53_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM51
52
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9
Notes
The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program.
If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker.
The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME)
and 5 to 8.
No.
Program
(group)
Sub-program
Input source
Features
7 MOVIE
THEATER 1
SPECTACLE
70 mm
SPECTACLE
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL
SPECTACLE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS
SPECTACLE
DTS
This program creates the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely
reproduces the source sound in detail, making
both the video and the sound field incredibly real.
This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded
with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
SCI-FI 70 mm SCI-FI
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL SCI-FI
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS SCI-FI
DTS
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form of science fiction
films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy
science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field
that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
8
MOVIE
THEATER 2
70 mm
ADVENTURE
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL
ADVENTURE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS ADVENTURE
DTS
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing
the sound design of the newest 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie
theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field
itself are restrained as much as possible.
GENERAL 70 mm GENERAL
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL GENERAL
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS GENERAL
DTS
This program is for reproducing sounds from
70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is
characterized by a soft and extensive sound field.
The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It
spatially spreads all around and toward the
screen, restraining the echo effect of
conversations without losing clarity. For the
surround sound field, the harmony of music or
chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the
rear of the sound field.
9 q/DTS
SURROUND
NORMAL
PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DOLBY DIGITAL/
NORMAL
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./NORMAL
DTS
The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds
and sound effects from sources.
The highly efficient decoding process improves
crosstalk and channel separation, and makes
sound positioning smoother and more precise.
In this program, the digital sound field processor
is not turned on.
ENHANCED PRO LOGIC/
ENHANCED
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DOLBY DIGITAL/
ENHANCED
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./ENHANCED
DTS
This program ideally simulates the multi-
surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film
theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby
Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital
sound field processing create precise effects
without altering the original sound orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field
wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to
the left and right, and toward the screen.
ADVENTURE
0110V620(UCA)_51-53_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM52
53
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2
Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded
by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of
sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without
using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound
localization that 6-channel soundtracks do.
When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel
These programs express an immense sound field and a
large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound
from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a
Dolby Stereo theater.
70 mm SPECTACLE
70 mm SCI-FI
70 mm ADVENTURE
70 mm GENERAL
The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your
home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of
being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology.
When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP)
These programs use YAMAHAs tri-field DSP processing
on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,
left surround and right surround channels. This
processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense
sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-
or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the
clear separation of all channels.
DGTL SPECTACLE
DTS SPECTACLE
DGTL SCI-FI
DTS SCI-FI
DGTL ADVENTURE
DTS ADVENTURE
DGTL GENERAL
DTS GENERAL
Presence DSP
sound field
Surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
y
If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically
switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
0110V620(UCA)_51-53_EN 1/16/1, 11:12 AM53
54
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
What is a sound field?
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,
there are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly
(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting
from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or
a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns for any
particular environment, and provide vital information to
our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct
sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of
a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
Sound Field Program Parameters
DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine
the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from
you to the performer, etc. In each program, these
parameters are set with values precisely calculated by
YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.
It is recommended to use DSP programs without
changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also
allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with
one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those
parameters.
Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you
to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment
to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters
correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that
create the sound field you experience in an actual concert
hall or other listening environment. The size of the room,
for example, affects the length of time between the early
reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in
many of the DSP programs alters the timing between
these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”
you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of
the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a
significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb
sound, for example, cause the reflections and
reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly
reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a
longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters
allow you to control these and many other factors that
contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to
essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.
provided to create custom-tailored listening environments
that ideally match your mood and music.
See “Sound Field Parameter Descriptions”.
0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 1/16/1, 11:44 AM54
55
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
Changing Parameter Settings
Although it is possible to enjoy playback on your system
without changing default setting parameters for the sound
field program, it is also possible to enjoy specifically
tailor the sound field program to the characteristics of the
source and the acoustics of the listening room.
1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN (or
AMP/TUN) position.
or
2 Turn on the video monitor
and press ON SCREEN
repeatedly to select the
full display mode.
3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
5
4
1
3
3
Program No. Program name (group)
Cursor
Parameters
Example of the MOVIE THEATER 1
4 Press u/d to select the
parameter.
5 Press j / i to change the
parameter value.
y
When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-
set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to
change other program parameters.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter value you edited will
return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter
value again.
Resetting a Parameter to the
Factory-set Value
Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and
hold j or i until the value temporarily stops at the
factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter
name disappears on the video monitor.
Notes
The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press u/d.
You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEMORY
GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to
change the parameter values, set “10 MEMORY GUARD” to
OFF.
P07 MOVIE THEATER 1
P. INIT. DLY
• • 13ms
70mm Spectacle
S. DELAY
• • • • • 23ms
P. ROOM SIZE • • 1.0
S. ROOM SIZE • • 1.0
0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 1/16/1, 11:45 AM55
56
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
Sound Field Parameter Descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening
room.
Note
Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program.
INIT.DLY (initial delay)
(P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field)
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Control range: 1 – 99 msec
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large
room, set it to a large value.
INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY
Level
Time
Level
Sound source
Early
reflections
Time
Level
Time
Sound source
Reflection surface
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
ROOM SIZE
(P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Control range: 0.1 – 2.0
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Level
Time
Level
Time
Sound source
Early reflections
Level
Time
Sound source
First reflection
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 1/16/1, 11:45 AM56
57
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
LIVENESS
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Control range: 0 – 10
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
“LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Level
Time
Dead
Level
Sound source
Time
Level
Time
Live
Sound source
Small reflected sound
Small value = 0
Large reflected sound
Large value = 10
S.DELAY (surround delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound
field.
Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.)
S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side
of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear
channels are used.
Control range: 1 – 49 msec
0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 1/16/1, 11:45 AM57
58
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control range: 0.1 – 2.0
S.LIVENESS (surround liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control range: 0 – 10
CT.DELAY (center delay)
Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 – 50 msec
LS.DELAY (left surround delay)
Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 – 50 msec
RS.DELAY (right surround delay)
Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 – 50 msec
0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 1/16/1, 11:45 AM58
59
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact
the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/ON
(or POWER) is
pressed, or enters in
the standby mode
soon after the power
has been turned on.
18
The power cord is not connected or the plug
is not completely inserted.
Firmly connect the power cord.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on
the rear panel is not fully set to the left or
right position.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position
when the unit is in the standby mode.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on
this unit and on all speakers are secure and
that the wire for each connection does not
touch anything other than its respective
connection.
No sound and/or no
picture.
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input
selector buttons).
The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
The main speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A
and/or B.
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
The picture does not
appear.
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video jacks.
Make connections using the same type of jack
(between composites, S-VIDEOs, or
components) for both the input and output.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
is set to the appropriate position and then turn
the unit back on.
Only the speaker on
one side can be heard.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
18
16, 17
12 – 15
23
16, 17
24
23
APPENDIX
The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Incorrect cable connections.
Check the speaker wires are not touching
each other and then turn the unit back on.
14, 15
18
16, 17
43
12 – 17
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
24
Digital signals other than PCM audio,
Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this
unit cannot reproduce are being input to
this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
24
On-screen display
does not appear.
The setting for the on-screen display is set to
“DISPLAY OFF”.
Select the full display or short display mode. 20
The BLUE BACK setting under “9
DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set
to OFF, and no video signal is input to this
unit.
Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show
the OSD.
41
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM59
60
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound effect is off.
Press EFFECT to turn it on.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS.
Select another DSP program.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being
input to this unit.
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is set
to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE.
Select the appropriate mode for your center
speaker.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)
has been selected.
Select another DSP program.
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal does not have a center
channel signal.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
The output level of the rear speakers is set
to minimum.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
A monaural source is being played with the
program 9.
Select another DSP program.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU
is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select BOTH.
The source does not contain low bass
signals (90 Hz and below).
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU
is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Poor bass
reproduction.
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU
is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system
does not include a subwoofer.
Select MAIN.
The output mode for each speaker (main,
center or rear) on the SET MENU does not
match your speaker configuration.
Select the appropriate output mode for each
speaker based on the size of the speakers in
your configuration.
28
51, 52
24
42
36
51, 52
42
51, 52
38
38
38
36, 37
12 – 15
12
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the
problem persists, the cables may be
defective.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your
turntable to the GND terminal of this unit.
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a
turntable with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to the unit
through an MC-head amplifier.
12, 13
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM60
61
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the REC OUT
jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The effect and
surround sounds
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the effect and
surround sounds by a recording component.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones
connected to a tape
deck or CD player that
is connected to this
unit.
There is noise
interference from
digital or high-
frequency equipment,
or the unit.
The unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move the unit further away from such
equipment.
When TUNER is
selected, the DSP
program name shown
on the display
immediately changes
to the frequency.
The OSD mode is set to short display or
display off.
If you want the DSP program name display
to be shown constantly, set the OSD mode to
full display.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
of this unit.
A source component is only connected to the
analog input jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the digital
input jacks of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“10 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU
is set to ON.
Select OFF.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen
by an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or by
a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the
outlet and then plug it in again after about
30 seconds.
This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit.
12
34
12 – 15
41
19
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM61
62
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
FM stereo
reception is noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts
may cause this problem when the
transmitter is too far away or the antenna
input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good
FM antenna.
There is multipath interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Previously preset
stations can no
longer be tuned in.
The unit has been disconnected for a long
period.
Re-store the stations.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
There are
continuous
crackling and
hissing noises.
Noises result from lightning, fluorescent
lamps, motors, thermostats and other
electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing
and whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
FM
AM
29, 30
29
29, 30
31
29, 30
29
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM62
63
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition the unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones.
The unit or other
component cannot be
controlled.
The component to be controlled has not been
selected.
Set the selector dial to the appropriate position,
corresponding to the component to be
controlled.
The remote control cannot control system
components.
The manufacturer code has not been set up
properly.
Enter the code again.
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer.
Depending on the manufacturer or the
model, some components cannot be
controlled with this unit’s remote control
even though the code has been set up
properly.
Use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
8
3
44
49
After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if
you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode,
disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM63
64
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................ 100 W
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ............ 90 W
1 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................ 110 W
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models] .......... 100 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ................................................... 115 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ohms
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................... 130/150/190/240 W
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]
..................................................................... 120/140/175/210 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more
Frequency Response
CD to Main L/R...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (MM) .................................................................. ±0.5 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO MM (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V, REC OUT) .... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R)
............................................................................... 0.06% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...... 86 dB or more
[Australia and Singapore models] ........................ 81 dB or more
CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .... 100 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB
Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz
Phones Output ..................................................... 400 mV/560 ohms
Input Sensitivity
CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms
PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms
6CH INPUT...................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
Maximum Input Signal
PHONO MM (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ...................... 100 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ....................................2.2 V or more
Output Level
REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/1.2 kohms
SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...................... NTSC
[Australia and Singapore models] ........................................... PAL
Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
S-Video Signal Level
Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
Component Video Signal Level
Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms
Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Australia, Singapore, China and General models]
...................................................................87.50 to 108.00 MHz
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono/Stereo ........................ 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) /23 µV (38.5 dBf)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ................................ 75 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 81 dB/75 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.1%/0.2%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 48 dB
Frequency Response (20 Hz to 15 kHz) .................................. ±1 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[Australia and Singapore models] ....................... 531 to 1611 kHz
[China and General models]
10 kHz step ....................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz
9 kHz step ......................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 52 dB
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...............................AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model]................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz
[Singapore model] ............................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz
[China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
[General model]........................ AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A., Australia, Singapore, China and General models]
.......................................................................................... 260 W
[Canada model] ...................................................... 260 W/330 VA
Standby Mode
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................. 0.8 W
[Australia and Singapore models] ..................................... 0.9 W
Maximum Power Consumption
[General model only]
5-ch, 10% THD ................................................................... 610 W
AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)
[U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models]
...........................................................................2 (SWITCHED)
[Australia model]..................................................1 (SWITCHED)
Dimension (W x H x D) ...................................435 x 151 x 390 mm
Weight ................................................................................... 10.5 kg
Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control
.......................................................................................Batteries
......................................................................... AM loop antenna
...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna
................................................................. Quick Reference Card
........................................................................Connection Guide
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM64
65
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording
system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel
for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.
With three front channels (left, center and right), and two
rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-
range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency
effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel).
Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and
the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with previously
unheard of excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial
representation of DTS digital surround in your home.
This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel
sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two
rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,
for a total of 5.1 channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any rear speakers by using
virtual rear speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a
minimum two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM65
66
GLOSSARY
S VIDEO signal
With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number
of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
I/O assignment (SET MENU)
Although component is normally connected according to
jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a
function that assigns jacks according to the component
being connected. If the component being used differs
from the component name shown for this unit’s
component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,
it is possible to assign jacks according to the component
being connected. This makes it possible to change the
jack assignment and effectively connect more component.
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM66
67
EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
INDEX
A
Accesories ................................................................................... 3
AC outlets .................................................................................. 18
Antennas .................................................................................... 29
B
Balance (L/R BALANCE) (SET MENU) ................................. 38
BGV function ............................................................................ 25
C
CBL/SAT position ..................................................................... 48
CD position................................................................................ 46
CINEMA DSP ..................................................................... 52, 65
Component video ...................................................................... 66
Connections
Antennas ............................................................................. 29
Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder,
CD player and turntable) .................................................... 12
External decoder ................................................................. 13
Power supply cords ............................................................ 18
Speakers ............................................................................. 16
Video components (DVD player, VCR and
TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ......................... 14
D
Delay time ................................................................................. 41
DISPLAY SET (SET MENU)
BLUE BACK ..................................................................... 41
DIMMER ........................................................................... 41
OSD SHIFT ........................................................................ 41
DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU)
D-RANGE .......................................................................... 40
LFE LEVEL ....................................................................... 40
Dolby Digital ............................................................................. 65
Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic)........................................... 65
DSP program
CINEMA DSP program...................................................... 51
Hi-Fi DSP program............................................................. 51
DTS ........................................................................................... 65
DTS SET (SET MENU) ............................................................ 40
Dust protection cap.................................................................... 12
DVD/LD position ...................................................................... 47
DVD MENU position................................................................ 47
E
External decoder ........................................................................ 13
F
Front panel................................................................................... 4
Front panel display ...................................................................... 9
H
HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) ................................................ 39
I
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ........................................... 18
INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ................................................... 39
Input modes ............................................................................... 25
I/O ASSIGNMENT (SET MENU)...................................... 39, 66
L
LFE ...................................................................................... 40, 65
M
Manufacturer codes ................................................................ 49, i
Memory back-up ..................................................... 31, 36, 42, 55
MEMORY GUARD (SET MENU)........................................... 41
Muting ....................................................................................... 24
P
PCM........................................................................................... 66
PHONO jacks ............................................................................ 12
Playing ....................................................................................... 23
Power supply cords ................................................................... 18
Preset stations
Exchanging preset station................................................... 33
Tuning in to a preset station ............................................... 32
Presetting stations
Automatic presetting .......................................................... 31
Manulal presetting .............................................................. 32
R
Rear panel .................................................................................. 10
Recording .................................................................................. 34
Remote control
Basic operation ..................................................................... 6
Batteries................................................................................ 3
Operation range .................................................................... 8
Setup codes ......................................................................... 49
S
Sampling frequency............................................................. 24, 66
Selector dial ........................................................................... 6, 44
SET MENU ............................................................................... 35
SILENT CINEMA............................................................... 28, 65
Sleep timer................................................................................. 43
Sound field ................................................................................ 54
SP DELAY TIME (SET MENU) .............................................. 41
Speaker
Output levels (LEVEL mode) ............................................ 36
Output mode (SET MENU) ............................................... 20
Placement ........................................................................... 11
Output balance (test tone) .................................................. 21
SPEAKER SET (SET MENU)
CENTER SP ....................................................................... 36
LFE/BASS OUT ................................................................ 38
MAIN LEVEL.................................................................... 38
MAIN SP ............................................................................ 37
REAR L/R SP..................................................................... 37
Stereo reproduction ................................................................... 28
Subwoofer ................................................................................. 17
S VIDEO ................................................................................... 66
T
TAPE/MD position .................................................................... 46
Test tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) ............................................... 21
TV position ................................................................................ 48
Tuning
Automatic tuning ................................................................ 30
Manual tuning .................................................................... 30
V
VCR position ............................................................................. 48
Video jacks ................................................................................ 14
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................................................... 28, 65
0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 1/16/1, 1:21 PM67
LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES
LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT
TV
A-MARK 1161
A TANDY 0941
ABEX 1151
ADMIRA 1141
ADVENTURA 1131
AIKO 1121
AIWA 1481
AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111
ALBA 0431
ALLERON 1091
AMBASSADOR 1081
AMSTRAD 0481, 1081
ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051,
1061, 1071
ANAM NATIONAL 1041
AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,
1111, 1161
ARCHER 1161
AUDIOSONIC 1001
AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161
BAUER 0441
BAUR 1001
BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561
BELCOR 1031
BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991
BEON 1001
BRADFORD 1051
BROCKWOOD 1031
BROKSONIC 1161
BUSH 1001
CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1131
CAPEHART 1021
CARVER 0101
CATHAY 1001
CELEBRITY 0951
CENTURION 0411
CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561,
1621
CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1121,
1131
CLAIRTONE 1011
CLARIVOX 1001
CONCERTO 0351, 0971
CONROWA 1751
CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011,
1051
CORANDO 0941
CRAIG 0251, 1051
CROWN 0941, 1051
CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361,
0931, 0941,
0981, 1111
CXC 1051
DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331,
0721, 0941, 1001,
1031, 1121, 1191,
1531, 1581, 1591,
1601
DANSAI 1001
DAYTRON 0941, 1031
DECCA 0271, 1001
DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071
DUMONT 0891, 1031
DYNATECH 0881
ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011
ELECTROHOME 0941
ELECTRON 0941
ELIN 1001
ELTA 0331
EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061,
0071, 0081, 0091,
0111, 0811, 0821,
0831, 0841, 0851,
0861, 0871, 0901,
0921, 0941, 0981,
1011, 1031, 1051,
1081, 1091
ENVISION 0361, 1111
ERRES 1001
ETRON 0331
FERGUSON 1001
FINLUX 1001
FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981
FORMENTI 0441
FORMONTI 1001
FORTRESS 1141
FUJITSU 1091
FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501,
1521
FUTURETECH 1051
GE 0131, 0161, 0201,
0751, 0761, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0811,
0861, 1041
GEC 0271, 1001
GEMINI 0391
GENEXXA 0431
GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111
GOLDSTAR 0031, 0121, 0351,
0411, 0731, 0741,
0861, 0941, 0971,
1001, 1031, 1111,
1151
GOODMANS/TASHIKO
0271, 0661, 1001
GRANADA 1001
GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801,
1811, 1821, 1831,
1841, 1851, 1861,
1871, 1881
GUNPY 1051, 1091
H/K 0721
HALLMARK 0861
HANSEATIC 1001
HARVARD 1051, 1061
HINARI 1001, 1091
HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671,
0681, 0691, 0701,
0711, 0871, 0941,
0971, 1351
HYPSON 1001
IMA 1051
INDIANA 1001
INFINITY REFERENCE
0101
INTERFUNK 1001
ITT 0611
JANEIL 1131
JBL 0101
JCB 0951
JENSEN 0311
JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551,
1561, 1571, 1621,
1631, 1641, 1651,
1691, 1731
JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641,
0651, 0661, 0841,
1201, 1211, 1221
KAWASHO 0901
KAYPANI 1021
KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111
KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131
KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,
1051, 1111
LEYCO 1001
LIESENK & TTER 1001
LLOYTRON 0941
LOEWE 1001
LOGIK 0991, 1771
LUXMAN 0351, 0971
LXI 0101, 0621, 0761,
0861, 0981
MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391,
0401, 0411, 0421,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0661,
0961, 1111
MAJESTIC 0991
MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361,
1001, 1111
MARK 1001
MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001
MEDIATOR 1001
MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161
MEI 1011
M-ELECTRONIC 1001
MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861,
0971, 0981, 0991,
1771
METZ 1791, 1831, 1891,
1901, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1941
MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,
0861, 1031, 1111
MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891,
0941, 1151
MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561,
0571, 0661, 0861,
1031, 1101, 1381
MONTGOMERY 1091
MOTOROLA 1041, 1141
MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,
0931, 0971, 1011,
1031, 1111
MULTITECH 0881, 1051
NAD 0551, 0621, 0861
NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,
0661, 0971, 1031,
1111, 1321, 1711
NECKERMANN 1001
NEI 1001
NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001,
1151
NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121
NOVABEAM 0721
NTC 1121
ONWA 1051
OPTIMUS 0551
OPTONICA 0541, 1141
ORION 0831, 1001
OSAKI 0271, 1151
OTTO VERSAND 1001
PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251,
0751, 1041, 1311,
1371, 1431
PANDA 1541, 1721
PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521,
0531, 0621, 0731,
0751, 0761, 0781,
0791, 0861, 0931,
0941, 1031, 1041,
1111, 1151, 1161
PEONY 1561, 1621
PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0631,
0961, 1031, 1111
PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001
PHONOLA 1001
PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111
PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871
PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121
PRICECLUB 0931
PRISM 0751
PROSCAN 0761
PROTECH 1001
PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941,
1021, 1161
PULSAR 0891
PULSER 1031
QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041
QUELLE 1001
RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941,
1031, 1051,
1151
RADIOLA 1001
RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,
0181, 0411, 0491,
0531, 0761, 0771,
0871, 1031
REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941,
0971, 0981, 1031,
1051, 1111, 1151
RHAPSODY 1011
R-LINE 1001
RUNCO 0891, 1111
SAISHO 0331, 1081
SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021,
1111, 1151
SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351,
0361, 0861, 0931,
0941, 0971, 1001,
1031, 1111, 1151
SAMSUX 0941
SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271,
0661, 0801, 0911,
0981, 1231, 1251,
1261
SBR 1001
SCHEIDER 1001
SCIMITSU 1031
SCOTCH 0861
SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941,
1031, 1051, 1091
SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171,
0351, 0481, 0521,
0621, 0761, 0801,
0861, 0971, 0981,
1091
SHANGHAI 1561, 1681
SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541,
0661, 0911, 0941,
1141, 1241, 1271
SHOGUN 1031
SIGNATURE 0991, 1771
SIMPSON 0581, 0961
SOLAVOX 1151
SONOKO 1001
ii
03V620_code(US/UCA) 1/16/1, 1:25 PM2
ii
SONTEC 1001
SONY 0371, 0451, 0661,
0841, 0951, 1281,
1441
SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051,
1091
SOUNDWAVE 1001
SPECTRICON 1161
SQUAREVIEW 0481
SSS 1031, 1051
STAR-LITE 1051
SUPREM 0951
SUPRE-MACY 1131
SURPA 0351, 0971
SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0961,
1111
SYMPHONIC 0481
SYSLINE 1001
TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141
TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001,
1041, 1161
TCL 1561, 1631, 1701
TECHNICS 0751
TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971
TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1051, 1091, 1121,
1131, 1771
TELETECH 0331
TERA 0501
THAKRAL 1671
THORM 1001
TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,
1081
TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621,
0661, 0931, 0981,
1301
TOSONIC 1011
TOTEVISION 0941
TRICAL 0911
UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791
UNIVERSUM 1001
VECTOR RESEARCH 0361,
1111
VESTEL 1001
VIDEO CONCEPT 1101
VIDIKRON 0101, 0211
VIDTECH 0861, 1031
VIKING 1131
WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451,
0541, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0861,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1091, 1111, 1771
WATSON 1001
XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661,
1741, 1761
YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111
YOKO 1001
ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891,
0991, 1771
ZONDA 1161
CABLE TV
ABC 0256, 0376
ANTRONIX 0136
ARCHER 0136, 0286
BBT 0076
CABLETIME 0166
CABLEVISION 0196
COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346
COMTRONICS 0216, 0276
EAGLE COMTRONICS
0276
EASTERN 0066
ELECTRICORD 0206
ELECTUS 0266
GE 0116, 0126
GEC CABLE SYSTEM
0196
HAMLIN H5 0676
HAMLIN H6 0666
HAMLIN H6S 0656
HAMLIN H8 0646
HAMLIN H9 0636
JERROLD 0256
JERROLD 400L 0626
JERROLD 450L 0616
JERROLD 550 0606
JERROLD OSD CATV
0596
JERROLD SPRUCER
0436
MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS
0416, 0426
MAMM 0296
MEMOREX 0386
MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206
NORTHCOAST 0016
NSC 0146
OAK 0106
OAK SIGMA 450 0546
OAK SIGMA 550 0536
PANASONIC TZ 120/130
0476
PANASONIC TZ 170/180
0446
PANASONIC TZ140 0466
PANASONIC TZ150/160
0456
PARAGON 0386
PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306,
0316, 0326, 0336,
0346
PIONEER 0006, 0086
PIONEER BR50 0846
PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82
0696
PIONEER BR90 0556
PULSAR 0386
RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE
SYSTEM 0396, 0406
REALISTIC 0136
REGENCY/EASTERN 0686
RUNCO 0386
SAMSUNG 0276
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475
0576
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75
0366, 0586
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650
0566
SIGNAL 0276
SL MARX 0276
SPECTAVISION 0236
STANDARD COMPONENTS
0186
STARCOM V 0256
STARGATE 0276
SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN
0376, 0496
TEKNIKA 0176
TELESERVICE 0056
TELEVIEW 0276
TEXSCAN 0186, 0376
TFC 0026
TOCOM 0226, 0356
TOCOM 5503A 0526
TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516
TOCOM TC56 0506
TOSHIBA 0386
TUDI 0046
UNIKA 0136
UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206,
0286
VIDEOWAY 0096
VIEWSTAR 0216
ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486
SATELLITE TUNER
ALPHA STAR 0826
CHAPARRAL 0756
ECHOSTAR 0836
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0776, 0876
HTS 0836
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0816
JERROLD 0776, 0786
PANASONIC 0806
PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786
RCA 0766
SONY 0796
(DSS)
HITACHI 0856
MAGNAVOX 0886
MEMOREX 0886
PHILIPS 0886
STAR CHOICE 0876
TOSHIBA 0866
UNIDEN 0886
VCR
A TANDY 0902
ADVENTURA 0992
AIKO 0982
AIWA 0992
AKAI 0262, 0942, 0952,
0962, 0972
AMERICAN HIGH 0932
AMSTRAD 0992
ASA 0002, 0912
ASHA 0922
AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202
AUDIOVOX 0912
BEAUMARK 0922
BELL & HOWELL 0902
BLAUPUNKT 0412
BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892
BUSH 0852
CALIX 0912
CANON 0862, 0932
CCE 0852, 0982
CITIZEN 0912, 0982
COLT 0852
CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852,
0912, 0922
CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822,
0932
CYBERNEX 0922
DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982
DBX 0202
DYNATECH 0472, 0992
ELECTROHOME 0912
ELECTROPHONIC 0912
EMEREX 0792
EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142,
0152, 0162, 0172,
0182, 0192, 0212,
0702, 0712, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0752,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0872, 0882, 0892,
0912, 0952, 0992,
1072
FINLUX 0002, 0992
FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842,
0902
FUJI 0672, 0932
FUNAI 0992
GARRARD 0992
GE 0662, 0822, 0932
GO VIDEO 0642, 0652
GOLDSTAR 0082, 0632, 0912
GOODMANS 0402
GRADIENTE 0992
GRANDA 0612, 0902
GRUNDIG 0002
H/K 1082
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0992
HARMAN/KARDON
0632,1082
HARWOOD 0752, 0852
HEADQUARTER 0612
HI-Q 0842
HINARI 0852
HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572,
0582, 0592, 0602,
0992
ITT 0942
JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532,
0542, 0552
KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612,
0632, 0902
KLH 0852
KODAK 0912, 0932
LLOYD 0992
LOGIK 0852
LUXOR 0942
LXI 0022, 0912
MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492,
0502, 0512, 0932
MAGNIN 0922
MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402,
0632, 0932
MARTA 0912
MATSUSHITA 0932
MATSUI 0722
MEI 0222, 0932
MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472,
0512, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0912, 0922,
0932, 0992
MGA 0762, 0952
MGA TECHNOLOGY
0922
MINOLTA 0592, 0602
MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542,
0762, 0952, 1082
MOTOROLA 0472, 0932
MTC 0922, 0992
MULTITECH 0852, 0992
NAD 0442
03V620_code(US/UCA) 1/16/1, 1:25 PM3
iii
NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,
0422, 0432, 0542,
0632
NIKKO 0912
NOBLEX 0922
OLYMPUS 0412, 0932
OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912
OPTONICA 0402
ORION 0212, 0722, 0742,
0772
OSAKI 0912
PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092,
0222, 0372, 0382,
0392, 0412, 0932
PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602,
0632, 0692, 0912,
0922, 0932
PENTAX 0592, 0602
PERDIO 0992
PHILCO 0002, 0932
PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402,
0492, 0932
PILOT 0912
PIONEER 0442, 0542
PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022,
1032, 1042, 1052,
1062
PULSAR 0512
QUARTER 0612
QUARTZ 0272, 0612
QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932
RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992
RADIX 0912
RANDEX 0912
RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,
0482, 0592, 0602,
0662, 0822, 0942
REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612,
0682, 0842, 0902,
0912, 0922, 0932,
0992
RICOH 0352, 0362
SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0772
SALORA 0612, 0762
SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922,
0962
SANKY 0472, 0512
SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832
SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0922
SBR 0002, 0282
SCHEIDER 0852
SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762,
0872, 0882, 0892
SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602,
0612, 0682, 0692,
0842, 0902, 0912,
0932
SHARP 0402, 0472
SHINTOM 0852
SHOGUN 0922
SINGER 0852
SONY 0032, 0332, 0352,
0362, 0672, 0792,
0932
STS 0602
SUNPAK 0352
SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502,
0762, 0932, 0992
SYMPHONIC 0992
TANDY 0992
TASHIKO 0712, 0992
TEAC 0992
TECHNICS 0932
TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932,
0992
TELEFUNKEN 0252
TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,
0922
TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342,
0622, 0682, 0712,
0762
TOTEVISION 0912, 0922
UNITECH 0922
VECTOR RESEARCH
0202, 0432, 0632
VIDEO CONCEPTS
0202, 0432, 0632,
0952
WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472,
0482, 0602, 0712,
0842, 0852, 0922,
0932, 0992
YAMAHA 0202, 0632
ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512,
0672
DVD PLAYER
AKAI 0108
DENON 0368
HITACHI 0388
JVC 0168, 0348
KENWOOD 0288
MAGNAVOX 0248
MITSUBISHI 0268
ONKYO 0128, 0248
PANASONIC 0048
PHILIPS 0188, 0248
PIONEER 0208, 0228
PROSCAN 0308
RCA 0308
SAMSUNG 0148
SHARP 0068
SONY 0028
TECHNICS 0048
THOMSON 0328
TOSHIBA 0088, 0248
YAMAHA 0008, 0048, 0188,
0248
ZENITH 0248
LD PLAYER
AIWA 0157
DENON 0147
DISCO VISION 0017
FUNAI 0157
HITACHI (E) 0017
KENWOOD 0087, 0107
MAGNAVOX 0027
MARANTZ 0027
MITSUBISHI 0137
NAD 0137
PANASONIC 0077, 0177
PHILIPS 0027
PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137
RCA 0167
REALISTIC 0157
SHARP 0127
SONY 0047, 0057, 0117
VICTOR 0097
YAMAHA 0007, 0067
CD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC RESEARCH
1295
ADC 0025, 0065
ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015
ADS 0265
AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035,
1055
AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535
ALPINE 1215, 1305
AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545
BSR 0245, 0655, 0775
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB
0055
CAPETRONIC 1205
CARRERA 0245
CARVER 0285, 1135
CASIO 0345
CROWN 0185
CURTIS MATHS 0345
DENON 0275, 0875, 0885
DEUAL (E) 0505
DYNAMIC BASS (H)
0555
EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105
EROICA 1275
FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925,
1005
GARRARD 0365
GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105
GOLDSTAR 1135, 1225, 1265,
1335
H/K 0105, 0175, 0465,
0995
HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505,
0815
INKEL 0115, 0395
JVC (VICTOR) 0315
KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405,
0585, 0725, 0735,
0745, 0755, 0895
KYOCERA 0025
LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675,
0705, 0715, 0985
MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645,
0955
MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375,
0785, 1345
MCINTOSH 0355, 1085
MCS 0905, 1315
MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235,
0305, 0325, 1105
MGA 0135
MISSION 0215
MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445
MTC 1255
NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,
0695
NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515
NEC 0255, 0905, 0965
NIKKO 0545, 1005
ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495,
0805, 1155
OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555,
0595, 0845, 0855,
0865, 0895, 0935
PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095,
1125
PENNY 0905
PHILIPS 0165, 0215
PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045
PROTON 0215, 1185
QUASAR 0055
RCA 0205, 0915, 1115
REALISTIC 0205, 0225, 0235,
0325, 0555, 0845
REVOX 1175
ROTEL 0215
SABA TELECOMMANDER (E)
0505
SAE 0215
SAMSUNG 1285
SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975,
1025, 1105
SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635,
0765
SCOTT 0325, 1105
SEARS 0345
SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895,
1065, 1075
SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395,
0475
SIEMENTS GARRARD
1245
SIGNATURE 0175
SONTEC 1165
SONY 0065, 0565, 0865,
1145
STARON 1235
STS 0025
SYLVANIA 0215
SYMPHONIC 0335
TANDY 0305
TANGBERG 1195
TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385,
0525, 0795, 0835,
1355
TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095
TECHWOOD 1325
TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505
THOMSON (E) 0505
TOSHIBA 0035, 0685
VECTOR RESEARCH
0065, 1135
WARDS 0175
YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,
0415, 0545, 0575,
1065
CD RECORDER/CD-
RW
HITACHI 0474
JVC 0504
MARANTZ 0484, 0494
PHILIPS 0444
PIONEER 0454, 0464
YAMAHA 0414
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0384
PIONEER 0424
SHARP 0434
SONY 0394
YAMAHA 0024, 0394, 0404
03V620_code(US/UCA) 1/16/1, 2:46 PM4
iv
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0094, 0214, 0224
AKAI 0184
CARVER 0094
DENON 0304
FISHER 0144
GARRARD 0194, 0204
JVC (VICTOR) 0274, 0284, 0294
KENWOOD 0124, 0134, 0154,
0234, 0244, 0264
MAGNAVOX 0094
MARANTZ 0094, 0344
MITSUBISHI 0184
OPTIMUS 0034, 0064, 0204,
0334
ONKYO 0364, 0374
PHILIPS 0094
PIONEER 0034, 0044, 0064
REVOX 0354
SANSUI 0094, 0344
SHARP 0264
SHERWOOD 0334
SONY 0054, 0084, 0324
TEAC 0194, 0254
TECHNICS 0074, 0314
WARDS 0034
YAMAHA 0004, 0014, 0104,
0114, 0164, 0174,
0264
03V620_code(US/UCA) 1/16/1, 1:25 PM5
OUTPUT
MAIN
R
L
R
L
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER
+
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+ ——+
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YPB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
LR
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
V
V
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
RLRL
DVD player
Main speakers A Main speakers B
RL
Rear speakers
Video signal
Optical signal
Signal flow
Center speaker
Subwoofer
system
Video Monitor
Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source)
L
R
V
Analog signal
(Europe model)
S Video signal
L R
S
S
O
O
S
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
*
RX-V620RDS only
*
V728180 RX-V620/RDS, HTR-5460 (ML)
C-guide RX-V620(ML) 1/16/1, 11:23 AM2
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
u/d
Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R)
Quick Reference Card
TAPE/MD (CD-R)
AMP/TUN
DSP/TUN
INPUT
p Play
r Rec/Pause
(tape/MD)
DSP
b DIR A (tape)
Skip – (MD/CD-R)
w Rewind (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
Numeric buttons
p Play
DISC SKIP –/+
DSP
CD
b Skip –
w Search
INDEX
INPUT
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
a Skip +
s Stop
f Search
AV POWER
PRESET –/+
DSP
DSP
A/B/C/D/E
6CH INPUT
6CH INPUT
j / i
Input
selector
buttons
DSP
program
group
buttons
EFFECT
INPUT
DSP
program
group
buttons
EFFECT
INPUT
SET MENU
STANDBY
TEST
Input
selector
buttons
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TV POWER
TV VOLUME
TV INPUT
POWER
VOLUME +/–
SLEEP
MUTE
V728090
+10 (MD/CD-R)
Deck A/B (tape)
DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)
e Pause (MD/CD-R)
a DIR B (tape)
Skip + (MD/CD-R)
s Stop
f Fast
forward (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
AV POWER
INDEX (CD-R)
V620(Q)_Quick 1/16/1, 11:25 AM1
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Quick Reference Card
Press this button twice to start recording.
Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.
Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.
Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.
V728090
*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.
Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.
Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.
DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD)
DSP
DVD/LD DVD MENU
CBL/SAT
TV
VCR
INDEX/Time (DVD)
Chapter/Time (LD)
INPUT
Numeric buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
a Skip + (DVD)
Skip/Chapter + (LD)
s Stop
f Search
AV POWER
AV POWER
Numeric
buttons
AV POWER
Numeric buttons
AV POWER
p Play
b Skip – (DVD)
Skip/Chapter – (LD)
w Search
DISC SKIP –/+
Return
DSP
INDEX
+10
INPUT
DISPLAY
Menu up
Menu right
Menu down
MENU
Menu select
Menu left
TITLE
Ch enter/
Recall
INPUT
DISPLAY
_/_ _
e Pause
s Stop
f Fast
forward
p Play
w Rewind
TV INPUT
TV VOL +/–
TV
POWER
CH –/+
DSP
Ch enter/
Recall
_/_ _
INPUT
DISPLAY
VCR pause
VCR stop
VCR fast
forward
VCR power
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
VCR play
VCR REC
VCR rewind
CH –/+
DSP
VCR REC
CH –/+
DSP
Ch enter
INPUT
_/_ _
DISPLAY/
Guide
(SAT)
Menu up
Menu
right
Menu
down
MENU
Menu
select
Menu left
Recall
*1
*1
V620(Q)_Quick 1/16/1, 11:25 AM2

Transcripción de documentos

UCA RX-V620 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V620(UCA)-cv1/4 1 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V722760 1/16/1, 11:06 AM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 8 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 9 10 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. 11 The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 12 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 14 15 1 16 17 18 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. II IIICAUTION 0101V620(UCA)_Cau_EN 2 1/16/1, 10:07 AM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19 ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE MAST GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 1. 3. APPENDIX We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. English YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. III CAUTIONIII II 0101V620(UCA)_Cau_EN 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ADVANCED OPERATION 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. BASIC OPERATION FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) PREPARATION Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING INTRODUCTION For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. 1/16/1, 10:07 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. III CAUTION IVIV 0101V620(UCA)_Cau_EN 4 1/16/1, 10:07 AM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION FEATURES ............................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ........................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11 Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 11 Speaker Placement ................................................. 11 Before Connecting Components ............................ 12 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12 Connecting an External Decoder ........................... 13 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ..................... 18 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 19 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 20 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ...................................................... 42 SLEEP TIMER .................................................... 43 Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 43 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 43 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 44 Selector Dial ........................................................... 44 Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the Selector Dial ....................................................... 45 Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit ........................................................ 45 Button Names and Functions in Each Position ...... 46 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 49 Returning to the Factory Setting ............................ 50 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E .................................................... 20 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 51 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ........................................................... 21 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 51 CINEMA DSP Programs ........................................ 51 Before You Begin ................................................... 21 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 21 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ......................................................... 54 BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................... 23 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 25 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 27 Normal Stereo Reproduction .................................. 28 What is a sound field? ............................................ 54 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 54 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 55 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 55 Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ...................... 56 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION OSD Modes ............................................................ 19 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 19 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 35 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 36 2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ................................................... 38 3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 39 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 39 5 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 39 6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) .................. 40 7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ................................ 40 8 SP DELAY TIME ............................................... 41 9 DISPLAY SET ................................................... 41 10MEMORY GUARD ........................................... 41 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12 SET MENU .......................................................... 35 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Description of the Numeric Buttons ........................ 7 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 8 Front Panel Display .................................................. 9 Rear Panel .............................................................. 10 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION APPENDIX TUNING ............................................................... 29 TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 59 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 64 GLOSSARY ......................................................... 65 INDEX .................................................................. 67 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ........................................ 29 Automatic (or Manual) Tuning .............................. 30 Presetting Stations .................................................. 31 Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 32 Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 33 BASIC RECORDING ......................................... 34 English 1 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 1 1/16/1, 11:19 AM FEATURES Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) Center: 100 W (8 Ω) Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] Main: 90 W + 90 W (8 Ω) Center: 90 W (8 Ω) Rear: 90 W + 90 W (8 Ω) ◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ) (10% THD, 1 kHz) [China and General models] Main: 115 W + 115 W (8 Ω) Center: 115 W (8 Ω) Rear: 115 W + 115 W (8 Ω) ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ DTS Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder Hi-Fi DSP CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Other Features ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 10 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 2 1/16/1, 11:19 AM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Remote control Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna PREPARATION Quick Reference Card Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) Quick Reference Card A/B/C/D/E 2 As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have been cleared. Note APPENDIX 1 ■ Changing batteries • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. Connection guide ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control BASIC OPERAIONT (Australia and Singapore models) ■ Notes on batteries English • Change the batteries periodically. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. 3 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 3 1/16/1, 1:41 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 4 3 5 6 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + B ON EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT 8 0 q w 9 FM/AM EDIT OFF PHONES 7 PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM er VIDEO L AUDIO R MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 6CH INPUT INPUT OPTICAL VIDEO AUX t y u i o p 1 STANDBY/ON 5 VOLUME Turns on or sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 6 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 2 Remote control sensor 7 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF Receives signals from the remote control. When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main speakers by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 4 INPUT MODE Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit (see page 25 for details). You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH INPUT as the input source. 4 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 4 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 BASS 9 TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main speakers. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. Note 0 SPEAKERS A/B When pushed in (ON), these buttons turn on the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off. If you turn off the output of these speakers by using EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the main left and right channels. When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left and right main channel signal levels may not match. Switches the function of the multi jog knob for selecting DSP program. e PHONES jack i MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only). o TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display again. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up. p INPUT l / h Selects the input source (CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD, D-TV/CBL, VCR 1, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR) you want to listen to or watch. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers. u FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. ADVANCED OPERATION w DSP PROGRAM y PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of the multi jog knob between selecting a preset station number and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. BASIC OPERAIONT q EFFECT t VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. PREPARATION • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. r Multi jog knob Selects the tuning frequency in the tuning mode. Selects the preset station after pressing PRESET/ TUNING (EDIT) to display “ z ” in the tuning mode. Selects the DSP program after pressing DSP PROGRAM. INTRODUCTION Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main speakers. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. APPENDIX English 5 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 5 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/ TUN position. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” for full details. 3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons) These buttons select the input source. See “Description of the Numeric Buttons” for the numeric buttons. 4 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 1 2 0 q Select the AMP/TUN position. w 5 TEST Outputs the test tone. 6 ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. 7 j / i (–/+) Adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. –/+ is displayed on the on-screen display. 3 8 LEVEL EFFECT 4 Selects the effect speaker channel (center, rear and subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level independently. 9 SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. 5 6 e r 7 0 INPUT Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the input selector. A/B/C/D/E q Indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 8 TV POWER TV VOLUME 9 t w Selector dial y u Turn this dial to select the position for the component to be controlled. (The proper code must be set up for your component. See “Setting the Manufacture Codes”.) When a position is selected, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. i e A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+ TV INPUT o These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E) PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) r u/d Select DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. 1 DSP t SET MENU Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP program selector. Enters the SET MENU. y POWER 2 Indicator window Turns on the power of this unit. Shows the name of components which can be controlled. u STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 6 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 6 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS i VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. o MUTE ■ When selecting a DSP program and turning on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) A INTRODUCTION Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. B EFFECT Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off in the following cases: • When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position. • While the indicator is lit for about 3 seconds after pressing DSP. The numeric buttons function in various ways depending on the position of the selector dial or the combination of other instructions. PREPARATION DSP program group buttons Description of the Numeric Buttons EFFECT A Press DSP regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 2 You can select a DSP program with the numeric buttons and turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT while the indicator is lit. ■ When selecting an input source BASIC OPERAIONT 1 B 6CH INPUT Press INPUT regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 2 You can select an input source with the numeric buttons and 6CH INPUT while the indicator is lit. Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN position. 2 You can select a DSP program directly with the numeric buttons and turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 1 ADVANCED OPERATION Input selector buttons APPENDIX English 7 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 7 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ When selecting a preset station number Using the Remote Control D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND – + – + 30° 1 Set code number “0023” in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. See “Setting the Manufacturer Code” for setting the code. 2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 3 You can select a preset station number directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8). See “Tuning in to a Preset Station”. 30° Approximately 6 m (20 feet) The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. 8 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 8 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 2 3 VIRTUAL V-AUX DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP PCM VCR2/DVR DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS VCR 1 5 D-TV/CBL MOVIE THEATER 1 2 ENTERTAINMENT DVD MD/CD-R TUNER PHONO TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY SLEEP dB ms w q 1 t indicator Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on. Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. 3 g and o indicators Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the builtin Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. Shows the current input source with a cursor. 5 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. 6 STEREO indicator 7 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 MEMORY indicator r t 9 x indicator Lights up when you select a DSP program. 0 v indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. q Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. w DSP program indicators The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. e Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. r VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. e ADVANCED OPERATION 4 Input source indicator VOLUME BASIC OPERAIONT 2 VIRTUAL indicator 8 CD SP AB 0 7 6 PREPARATION 9 4 INTRODUCTION 1 t SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Flashes to show a station can be stored. APPENDIX English 9 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 9 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 34 DIGITAL INPUT CD 5 6 DVD GND R TUNER AM ANT GND + – SPEAKERS – + L A 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL AC OUTLETS MONITOR OUT D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER 9 FM ANT D-TV/CBL COAXIAL 8 7 DVD D-TV/CBL Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR B SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL VIDEO CENTER + – MD/CD-R IMPEDANCE SELECTOR S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER SET BEFORE POWER ON VIDEO SIGNAL OPTICAL MD/CD-R R + – – + L MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR L REAR (SURROUND) R DIGITAL OUTPUT PHONO CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT VCR 1 IN OUT VCR 2/DVR SUB WOOFER OUTPUT q 0 w (U.S.A. model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 9 AC OUTLET(S) 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/ video components (see page 18). 3 GND terminal 0 Audio component jacks See page 12 for connection information. 4 6CH INPUT jacks See page 13 for connection information. 5 Antenna input terminals See page 29 for connection information. 6 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. q SUBWOOFER jack See page 17 for connection information. w IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 18). 7 Speaker terminals See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. China and General models only 8 AC power cord FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 29. Connect to a power outlet. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 18. 10 0102V620(UCA)_1-10_EN 10 1/16/1, 11:19 AM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. ■ Subwoofer CAUTION 11 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 11 1/16/1, 11:19 AM English Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected even when magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens. APPENDIX The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Rear speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. Main speaker (R) BASIC OPERATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer to ensure even tonal quality. Speaker Placement INTRODUCTION Speakers to Be Used CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has a coaxial digital output jack. • When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack. y ■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD recorder or tape deck y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “4 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital jack. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal. 12 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 12 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONNECTIONS SUBWOOFER OUTPUT MAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT CD player External decoder INTRODUCTION COAXIAL OUTPUT L C R L R R L SURROUND OUTPUT DVD GND TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT CD CENTER OUTPUT D-TV/CBL COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL MONITOR OUT D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL BASIC OPERATION OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL OUTPUT PHONO IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN OUT VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD AUDIO SIGNAL O R L R IN OUT VCR 2/DVR L SUB WOOFER OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION L CD O R GND INPUT OUTPUT OPTICAL INPUT OUTPUT MD recorder or CD recorder OPTICAL OUTPUT Turntable indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. APPENDIX Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION indicates signal direction L Notes 13 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 13 1/16/1, 11:19 AM English • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items 1A to 1E on the SET MENU is not affected. CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composit video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. y VIDEO jack (composite) S VIDEO jack Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO jacks • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary to make composite video connections. If both types of connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video signal. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “4 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU. Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT Game console S VIDEO OUT 14 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 14 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONNECTIONS Monitor OPTICAL OUTPUT COMPONENT COMPONENT OUTPUT INPUT INTRODUCTION DVD player AUDIO OUTPUT O S VIDEO OUTPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT V S PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT CD S VIDEO INPUT V S DVD GND TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT D-TV/CBL COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL MONITOR OUT D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR D-TV/CBL (U.S.A. model) VIDEO MD/CD-R R SUB WOOFER BASIC OPERATION S VIDEO R VIDEO SIGNAL OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R PHONO DIGITAL OUTPUT IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD IN D-TV/CBL DVD AUDIO SIGNAL OPTICAL OUTPUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT V L R L R TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner S VIDEO INPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT L R S ADVANCED OPERATION S IN OUT VCR 2/DVR AUDIO INPUT VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT O OUT VCR 1 S V V VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video VIDEO OUTPUT recorder) AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AUDIO OUTPUT indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables S indicates S-video cables 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 15 1/17/1, 4:38 PM English 15 APPENDIX When using an LD player Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack. If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack. If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog input jack (D-TV/CBL, VCR 1 or VCR 2/DVR). For details on connections and operations, refer to the instruction manual for the LD player. Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for the DVD/LD position. CONNECTIONS Connecting the Speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 2 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 3 y (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and General models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 16 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONNECTIONS Main speakers A VD R + – SPEAKERS + – PREPARATION (U.S.A. model) Left Right Left INTRODUCTION Right Main speakers B L A V/CBL MAIN AC OUTLETS ITOR UT COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT B SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL VIDEO CENTER + – BASIC OPERATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR S VIDEO SET BEFORE POWER ON R + – + – MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 REAR :6 L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER REAR (SURROUND) SUB WOOFER OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION Right Subwoofer Center speaker system Left Rear speakers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SUBWOOFER jack APPENDIX When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes English • Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operating instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.) • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “6 DOLBY D. SET” and “7 DTS SET” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 17 0103V620(UCA)_11-17_EN 17 1/16/1, 11:19 AM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. (General model) Switch Speaker position VOLTAGE SELECTOR Main AC OUTLETS Left SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL Center MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 :8 REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR IMPEDANCE SELECTOR The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 W or higher. [Canada model only] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 W or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Right VOLTAGE SELECTOR If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 W or higher. Rear IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON Impedance level ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models ............................................ 2 OUTLETS Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. MAINS AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR To AC outlet SWITCHED 18 0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 18 1/16/1, 11:20 AM ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) Selecting the OSD Mode When you turn on the power, the video monitor and front panel display show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “9 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU. PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. OSD Modes Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS 45ms 1.0 5 P01 CONCERT HALL Full display ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P01 CONCERT HALL Notes • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. ADVANCED OPERATION Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. BASIC OPERAIONT You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Short display y APPENDIX • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. English 19 0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 19 1/16/1, 11:20 AM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit is equipped with a main amplifier capable of handling 5.1 channel. Although up to 6 speakers can be connected, it is possible to select the speaker mode that gives the best sound field effect according to the number and size of speakers being used. Before use, please set the speaker mode setting using “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU described on page 36. Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E Description Control value (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. 1E MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. Item Normal/–10 dB 20 0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 20 SWFR/MAIN/BOTH 1/16/1, 11:20 AM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. Note A/B/C/D/E INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. 2,6 1 PREPARATION • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. 5 4 Before You Begin 3 1 A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERAIONT VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE – + – + B ON EFFECT EDIT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. 3 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. INPUT OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. STANDBY /ON Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A B LEFT RIGHT (TEST LEFT) (TEST RIGHT) OFF ON Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to the center position and set BASS EXTENSION to OFF. BASS EXTENSION OFF – Set to OFF. + CENTER (TEST CENTER) TREBLE – + LEFT SURROUND (TEST L SUR.) RIGHT SURROUND (TEST R SUR.) APPENDIX ON BASS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 FM/AM ADVANCED OPERATION 2 3 PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM OFF SILENT 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 6CH INPUT SPEAKERS A PHONES 3 1 SURROUND STANDBY /ON English 21 0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 21 1/16/1, 11:20 AM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. Notes • For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, see the effect speaker level adjustment described on page 42. • After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual source when using the effect speaker level adjustment described on page 42. y LEFT y • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 4 • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker to be adjusted. y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker to be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) 5 Press j / i repeatedly to adjust the output level of the currently selected speaker so that it becomes almost the same as that of the main speaker. • While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the output levels of the center, left rear and right rear speakers. 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops and the current DSP program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. 22 0104V620(UCA)_18-22_EN 22 1/16/1, 11:20 AM BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK 1 6 5 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + B ON EFFECT PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM EDIT OFF PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT 5 L AUDIO R FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons) to select the input source. • The current input source is indicated on the front panel display with a cursor. • The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. 6CH INPUT INPUT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT OPTICAL or VIDEO AUX 3 2 6 PREPARATION BASS EXTENSION 3 Front panel Remote control A/B/C/D/E V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO 1 3 5 Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. The front panel display and the video monitor show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. or Front panel 2 VCR 1: VCR 2/DVR: V-AUX: Remote control SPEAKERS A ON B OFF APPENDIX Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. PHONO: CD: TUNER: MD/CD-R: DVD: D-TV/CBL: To reproduce the signal from this component Turntable CD player AM/FM tuner MD recorder/CD recorder/tape deck DVD player TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner Video cassette deck 1 Video cassette deck 2/digital video recorder Another audio/video component (connected to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION STANDBY /ON Select this: ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E Selected input source BASIC OPERATION VOLUME 1 INTRODUCTION When using the remote control, set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position. Front panel English 23 0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 23 1/16/1, 11:14 AM BASIC PLAYBACK To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. 6 Use the digital sound field processor. See “Selecting a Sound Field Program”. DSP PROGRAM 6CH INPUT or Front panel or Remote control Front Panel Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. 4 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 5 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or Remote control If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. BASS BASS EXTENSION – OFF ■ To mute the sound Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output. Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. y • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. ■ When you have finished using this unit Front panel ON Remote control + TREBLE – + Front panel Note • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these cases, turn on the component. Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set this unit in the standby mode. ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the front panel display. V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME PCM 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. Note • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1D LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 42 cannot be made. 24 0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 24 1/16/1, 11:14 AM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ BGV (background video) function Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on the front panel. Notes Input Modes and Indications This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. ADVANCED OPERATION Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. BASIC OPERATION When using the remote control, set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position. • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and DVD players in the following situation: When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback is resumed. • Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG. PREPARATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANLG (ANALOG): In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. INTRODUCTION The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) AUTO: INPUT MODE Front panel V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or Remote control D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME APPENDIX Input mode English 25 0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 25 1/16/1, 11:14 AM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • The following phenomena may occur if the input mode is set to AUTO when playing back source encoded with a DTS. – If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal this unit automatically switches to the “DTSdecoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the front panel display.) The “t” indicator may flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed. If this status continues for a certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. 26 0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 26 1/16/1, 11:14 AM BASIC PLAYBACK Selecting a Sound Field Program VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE ■ On the remote control BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + ON B EFFECT FM/AM EDIT OFF PHONES 1 PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 6CH INPUT INPUT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX INTRODUCTION You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM”. ■ On the front panel 1 2 A/B/C/D/E 1 y 2 Turn the multi jog knob to select the program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. DSP PROGRAM Notes • If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, skip this step. 2 Press DSP PROGRAM. VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD APPENDIX V-AUX DIGITAL PHONO MOVIE THEATER 1 DSP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Program group ADVANCED OPERATION Use the numeric buttons to select the desired program before the indicator goes off. • For example, to select the sub-program “SPECTACLE”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. • The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. BASIC OPERATION Press DSP. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 1 PREPARATION 2 VOLUME Program name (sub-program) English 27 0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN 27 1/16/1, 11:14 AM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA Normal Stereo Reproduction Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using YAMAHA original technology, natural surround reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual speaker. EFFECT The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. Front panel Remote control y Note • This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT CINEMA). SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening through the speakers. • If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote control. Notes • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center and rear speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “6 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers are on. 28 0105V620(UCA)_23-28_EN or 28 1/16/1, 11:14 AM TUNING Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. 100KHZ /10KHZ 50KHZ /9KHZ Indoor FM antenna (included) 5 Antenna stand 1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. 2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. 5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. FM ANT 75 2 4 TUNER AM ANT GND 1 UNBAL. ADVANCED OPERATION (U.S.A. model) 3 BASIC OPERATION AM loop antenna (included) ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna PREPARATION FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) FREQUENCY Because the interstation frequency spacing STEP differs in different areas, set the FM/AM FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. INTRODUCTION Connecting the Antennas y Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. terminal. • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Note APPENDIX ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Notes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. English 29 0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 29 1/16/1, 11:14 AM TUNING y Automatic (or Manual) Tuning • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. VOLUME D I G I T A L If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + ON B EFFECT PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM FM/AM EDIT OFF PHONES S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R 6CH INPUT INPUT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 1 Press INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 4 2 1 3 INPUT FM/AM 1 Press INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. INPUT or 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. FM/AM TUNING MODE or AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO Goes off If “ z ” appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT Lights up If “ z ” appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING Turn “ z ” off. 4 Turn the multi jog knob to the right or left to tune in to the desired sration manually. EDIT Turn “ z ” off. 4 Turn the multi jog knob to the right or left to begin automatic tuning. Turn the multi jog knob to the right for tuning in to a higher frequency, or to the left for tuning in to a lower frequency. Turn the knob again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. Note • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. 30 0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 30 1/16/1, 11:15 AM TUNING Notes Presetting Stations VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE – + – 6CH INPUT SPEAKERS A + ON B PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM EFFECT EDIT OFF PHONES S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. ADVANCED OPERATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 1 32 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which the unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3): 1. Turn the multi jog knob to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off “ z ” and then turn the multi jog knob to the left to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PREPARATION You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see “Tuning in to a Preset Station”). INTRODUCTION ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations”. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R APPENDIX V-AUX TUNER AUTO MEMORY VOLUME When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 31 0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 31 1/16/1, 11:15 AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations Tuning in to a Preset Station You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. ■ On the remote control VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE – + – 6CH INPUT SPEAKERS A + ON B PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM EFFECT EDIT OFF PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 1 INPUT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 3 2,4 1 Tune in to a station. See “Automatic (or Manual) Tuning” for tuning instructions. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. 3 2 A/B/C/D/E 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position and press TUNER to select TUNER as the input source. Turn the multi jog knob to select a preset station number while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Turn the multi jog knob to the right to select a higher preset station number, and to the left to select a lower preset station number. 2 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. 3 MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 4 V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD A/B/C/D/E Press PRESET –/+ to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PHONO TUNED STEREO AUTO VOLUME V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO AUTO Shows the displayed station has been stored as A1. VOLUME 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. y • You can select the preset station number with the numeric buttons (1 to 8) if code number “0023” has been set up in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 32 0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 32 1/16/1, 11:15 AM TUNING ■ On the front panel Exchanging Preset Stations VOLUME D I G I T A L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + ON B EFFECT PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM FM/AM EDIT OFF MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 6CH INPUT You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. INPUT VOLUME D I G I T A L PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SILENT VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION 2 1 ON OFF BASS TREBLE – + – + ON B PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM EFFECT OFF S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2,4 EDIT 1 Tune in to preset station “E1”. See “Tuning in to a Preset Station”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. PRESET /TUNING EDIT TUNER CD PHONO BASIC OPERATION VCR2/DVR AUDIO R AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET /TUNING Turn the multi jog knob to select tne desired preset station number. The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. V-AUX L MAN'L/AUTO FM INPUT TUNING MODE MEMORY PREPARATION 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) so that “ z ” next to the band indicator appears. FM/AM EDIT PHONES 1 6CH INPUT SPEAKERS A INTRODUCTION D I G I TA L TUNED STEREO AUTO VOLUME V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO MEMORY 3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MEMORY 4 ADVANCED OPERATION VOLUME PRESET /TUNING V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO MEMORY APPENDIX EDIT VOLUME 33 0106V620(UCA)_29-33_EN 33 1/16/1, 11:15 AM English Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. BASIC RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + ON B EFFECT PRESET /TUNING DSP PROGRAM EDIT OFF PHONES S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 6CH INPUT INPUT OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 2 If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. A/B/C/D/E 1 2 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “2 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. Turn on the power to the unit and all connected component. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT or Remote control Front panel 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded. Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are output from the player’s analog outputs. 34 0107V620(UCA)_34_EN 34 1/16/1, 11:15 AM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU INTRODUCTION The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the speaker mode setting features. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system. Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU y Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E 1 3,6 4,5 2 PREPARATION • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. Note • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP A/B/C/D/E Note 1C REAR L/R SP • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1D LFE/BASS OUT 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 1E MAIN LEVEL 2 L/R BALANCE BASIC OPERAIONT 1B MAIN SP 3 HP TONE CTRL ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU 1/3 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT 1 SPEAKER SET 2 L/R BALANCE 3 HP TONE CTRL 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT / : Up/Down –/+ : Enter 4A CMPNT-V INPUT 4B OPTICAL OUT 4C OPTICAL IN 3 4D COAXIAL IN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 5 INPUT MODE Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to 10) you want to adjust. SET MENU 1/3 6 DOLBY D. SET 1 SPEAKER SET 2 L/R BALANCE 3 HP TONE CTRL 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT / : Up/Down –/+ : Enter LFE LEVEL D-RANGE 7 DTS SET y 8 SP DELAY TIME 4 BLUE BACK OSD SHIFT DIMMER Press j or i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. 10 MEMORY GUARD 4A CMPNT-V INPUT English [A] • • • • • DVD [B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL 35 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN APPENDIX • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 9 DISPLAY SET 35 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SET MENU Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 4B OPTICAL OUT (1) • • • • • MD/CD-R 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 4A CMPNT-V INPUT [A] • • • • • VCR 1 [B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group button to exit from the SET MENU. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B and 1D are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1E are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. or 1A CENTER SP Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE 36 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 36 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SET MENU 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. 1C REAR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LRG SML NONE 1B MAIN SP SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP SMALL ADVANCED OPERATION SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1C REAR L/R SP 1B MAIN SP LARGE BASIC OPERATION LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. LARGE PREPARATION ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) INTRODUCTION NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. LRG SML NONE SMALL y Note APPENDIX • When you select MAIN for “1D LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. • This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. English 37 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 37 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SET MENU ■ 1D LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) ■ 1E MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal Normal Normally select this setting. 1D LFE/BASS OUT SWFR 1E MAIN LEVEL MAIN BOTH MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1D LFE/BASS OUT Normal –10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. 1E MAIN LEVEL SWFR MAIN BOTH BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1D LFE/BASS OUT SWFR MAIN BOTH Normal –10dB 2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. Control range: 10 for L/R Initial setting: 0 Notes • When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette etc.), select the BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack. • When you select SMALL (SML) for items 1A, 1B and 1C, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer. Press i to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press j for the right main speaker. 2 L/R BALANCE L • • • • • • • • • • II • • • • • • • • • • R 0 –/+ / : Adjust : Exit Note • The L/R BALANCE setting also applies to when headphones are being used. 38 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 38 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SET MENU 3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. ■ 4C OPTICAL IN (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) 4C OPTICAL IN Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) (2) • • • • • MD/CD-R (3) • • • • • DVD (4) • • • • • D-TV/CBL 3 HP TONE CTRL 0dB + ■ 4D COAXIAL IN (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) Initial setting: (5) CD 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT 4D COAXIAL IN (5) • • • • • Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/CBL 4A CMPNT-V INPUT [A] • • • • • DVD [B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R 5 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning on the power with the source component connected to more than one type of the input jacks. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO 5 INPUT MODE AUTO –/+ / 4B OPTICAL OUT (1) • • • • • MD/CD-R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ 4B OPTICAL OUT (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack) Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ 4A CMPNT-V INPUT (for the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) CD BASIC OPERATION It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). PREPARATION BASS TRBL – LAST : Select : Exit LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. APPENDIX AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. English 39 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 39 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SET MENU MAX Output level 6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. Dialog level 6 DOLBY D. SET Input level LFE LEVEL • • • • 0dB D-RANGE • • • MAX STD MIN ■ LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the lowfrequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB Notes • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. • Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at home. ■ D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds). Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level : Adjust : Select Output level –/+ / MIN STD Dialog level 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB 7 DTS SET LFE LEVEL • • • • 0dB –/+ / : Adjust : Exit Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. 40 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 40 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SET MENU 8 SP DELAY TIME 9 DISPLAY SET BLUE BACK • • • AUTO OSD SHIFT • • • • • • 0 DIMMER • • • • • • • • • • 0 ■ BLUE BACK ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) 8 SP DELAY TIME This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. BASIC OPERATION CENTER • • • • • • 0ms Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 : Adjust : Exit Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Press j to raise the position of the OSD. Center speaker image PREPARATION Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a blue background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display. Initial setting: AUTO Control range (ms): 0 to 5 Initial setting: 0 ms –/+ / 9 DISPLAY SET INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. R C Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 ADVANCED OPERATION C L 10 MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RR RL Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF 10 MEMORY GUARD y OFF • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of the center speaker. –/+ / ON : Select : Exit APPENDIX Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Notes 41 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 41 1/16/1, 11:11 AM English • When “10 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “10 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E 1 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or left and right rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. 3 2 Notes A/B/C/D/E 1 2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, left rear and subwoofer. • If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • For details on adjusting speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting procedure using the test tone on page 21 is recommended. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the output level of the effect speakers you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the output level again. Center speaker output level CENTER Right rear speaker output level Left rear speaker output level R SUR. L SUR. Subwoofer output level SWFR y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) 42 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 42 1/16/1, 11:11 AM SLEEP TIMER 4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO DIGITAL SLEEP DSP VOLUME INTRODUCTION Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. A/B/C/D/E 2 y A/B/C/D/E 2 Set the selector dial to a position other than the TV position. 3 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. 120 90 60 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select a source and start playback on the source component. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO APPENDIX DIGITAL SLEEP DSP BASIC OPERAIONT 3 PREPARATION Canceling the Sleep Timer Setting the Sleep Timer VOLUME English 43 0108V620(UCA)_35-43_EN 43 1/16/1, 11:11 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component). Note • For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer each description in this manual. Selector Dial Select the component (position) controlled by the remote control. For example, if the CD position is selected, the remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. When turning the selector dial, the position changes as follows: AMP/TUN You can perform the basic operations of this unit. TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA MD recorder is factory-set. Be sure to set the proper code when operating a CD recorder or tape deck. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory-set. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. VCR A VCR can be controlled. Selector dial DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD position. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory-set. TV A TV can be controlled. DSP/TUN This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. Notes • The general operational buttons on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. See the following pages for details. • When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 50 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code. 44 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 44 1/16/1, 11:11 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the Selector Dial INTRODUCTION Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can control this unit and your TV with the following buttons. Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit The example below describes the procedure for controlling a YAMAHA CD player. Note # 3 2 6 PREPARATION 2 5 3 4 1 ! @ A/B/C/D/E 1 • You have to set up the code for your TV in the TV position before you can control the TV. A/B/C/D/E 4 5 Turn on the power. 3 Press INPUT. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 4 Press CD while the indicator is lit. 5 Press p. See “Button Names and Functions in Eash Position” for the CD player operation buttons. 6 Adjust the volume. See “Remote Control”. 1 2 3 4 STANDBY POWER VOLUME +/– SLEEP Note • If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to set the sleep timer for the TV. 5 MUTE Note • If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound. ■ Controlling your TV APPENDIX If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. See “Setting the Manufacturer Codes” for details. ! TV POWER @ TV INPUT # TV VOLUME +/– ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Set the selector dial to the CD position. BASIC OPERAIONT ■ Controlling this unit 1 English 45 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 45 1/16/1, 11:12 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Button Names and Functions in Each Position ■ TAPE/MD position (tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder) Select the TAPE/MD position. Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R) INDEX (CD-R) r Rec/Pause (tape/MD) e Pause (MD/CD-R) A/B/C/D/E p Play b DIR A (tape) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. Skip – (MD/CD-R) +10 (MD/CD-R) Deck A/B (tape) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) a DIR B (tape) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. Skip + (MD/CD-R) s Stop f Fast forward (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) w Rewind (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) AV POWER This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. ■ CD position Select the CD position. Numeric buttons INDEX Pause/Stop function +10 • Press the button once to give a y pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. DISPLAY DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) p Play b Skip – w Search A/B/C/D/E e Pause YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop a Skip + s Stop YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop f Search AV POWER This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 46 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 46 1/16/1, 11:12 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ DVD/LD position INTRODUCTION Select the DVD/LD position. Numeric buttons PREPARATION INDEX/Time (DVD) Chapter/Time (LD) +10 DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD) DISPLAY p Play A/B/C/D/E b Skip – (DVD) Skip/Chapter – (LD) w Search e Pause a Skip + (DVD) Skip/Chapter + (LD) s Stop BASIC OPERAIONT f Search AV POWER (DVD) This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. (LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. ■ DVD MENU position ADVANCED OPERATION Note • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. Select the DVD MENU position. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Numeric buttons INDEX +10 DISC SKIP –/+ Return Menu select TITLE Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU APPENDIX Menu left DISPLAY A/B/C/D/E AV POWER This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 47 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 47 1/16/1, 11:12 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ VCR position ■ CBL/SAT position Select the VCR position. Select the CBL/SAT position. VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. p Play A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Ch enter/Recall Ch enter _/_ _ _/_ _ CH –/+ DISPLAY CH –/+ e Pause Menu select s Stop w Rewind f Fast forward AV POWER This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your VCR. Menu left Recall DISPLAY/ Guide (SAT) A/B/C/D/E Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU AV POWER This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your cable TV/satellite tuner. ■ TV position Note • You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for it in the VCR position. Select the TV position. Numeric buttons Ch enter/Recall VCR REC Press this button twice. _/_ _ CH –/+ DISPLAY p VCR play A/B/C/D/E e VCR pause s VCR stop w VCR rewind TV POWER This button turns on a TV that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your TV. TV VOL +/– TV INPUT f VCR fast forward VCR power TV SLEEP TV MUTE • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 48 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 48 1/16/1, 11:12 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 1 2 3 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and reenter the code. 3 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and reenter the code. 5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Set the selector dial to the CBL/SAT or DVD MENU position. APPENDIX • You can set up only one code for one position. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions: Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set up the code for a DVD player when the selector dial is set to the DVD MENU position. The code set up in the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously set up in the DVD MENU position. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. Turn on the VCR to be used. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes 1 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Press AV POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Note • In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU position, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD position. BASIC OPERAIONT 5 Set the selector dial to the desired position for the component (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/LD, etc.). PREPARATION 4 Turn on your component to be used. You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/ SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV/satellite tuner or DVD player is not being used. INTRODUCTION You can set up the code for the manufacturer of your component in each position of the selector dial. ■ To use a second (and third) VCR English 49 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 49 1/16/1, 11:12 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Returning to the Factory Setting ■ To return to the factory-set codes in all positions 1 2 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. ■ To return to the factory-set codes in each position 1 Set the selector dial to the position for the component to be returned to the factory setting. 2 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are factory set. Selector dial position TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD Component TV Cable TV VCR DVD player CD player MD recorder Code 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder) Set component We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above. 50 0109V620(UCA)_44-50_EN 50 1/16/1, 11:12 AM Set code ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM Note • Regardless of the program name and features listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you. Hi-Fi DSP Programs No. Program (group) Sub-program Features CONCERT HALL — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 5CH STEREO Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Note • Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6 No. Program (group) Sub-program GAME Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. 51 51 1/16/1, 11:12 AM English ENTERTAINMENT APPENDIX 4 0110V620(UCA)_51-53_EN ADVANCED OPERATION DISCO BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4 INTRODUCTION A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9 No. 7 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE SPECTACLE 70 mm SPECTACLE THEATER 1 SCI-FI 8 9 q/DTS NORMAL SURROUND ENHANCED Features Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). DGTL SPECTACLE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SPECTACLE DTS 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SCI-FI DTS MOVIE ADVENTURE 70 mm ADVENTURE THEATER 2 GENERAL Input source Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL ADVENTURE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS ADVENTURE DTS 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS GENERAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ NORMAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ ENHANCED Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ ENHANCED Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED DTS This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. This program ideally simulates the multisurround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. Notes • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5 to 8. 52 0110V620(UCA)_51-53_EN 52 1/16/1, 11:12 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2 The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. INTRODUCTION Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel Surround DSP sound field The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP) Right surround DSP sound field DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Left surround DSP sound field ADVANCED OPERATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION 70 mm SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE 70 mm GENERAL PREPARATION These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. Presence DSP sound field APPENDIX y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. English 53 0110V620(UCA)_51-53_EN 53 1/16/1, 11:12 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What is a sound field? What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Sound Field Program Parameters DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. See “Sound Field Parameter Descriptions”. 54 0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 54 1/16/1, 11:44 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings 3 1 A/B/C/D/E Press u/d to select the parameter. 5 Press j / i to change the parameter value. INTRODUCTION Although it is possible to enjoy playback on your system without changing default setting parameters for the sound field program, it is also possible to enjoy specifically tailor the sound field program to the characteristics of the source and the acoustics of the listening room. 4 2 4 5 y 3 6 A/B/C/D/E Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN (or AMP/TUN) position. or 2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust. Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold j or i until the value temporarily stops at the factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. Program No. Program name (group) P07 MOVIE THEATER 1 Cursor 70mm Spectacle INIT. DLY • • 13ms ROOM SIZE • • 1.0 DELAY • • • • • 23ms ROOM SIZE • • 1.0 APPENDIX P. P. S. S. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u/d. • You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “10 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. BASIC OPERATION 1 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. PREPARATION • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. Parameters Example of the MOVIE THEATER 1 English 55 0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 55 1/16/1, 11:45 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Sound Field Parameter Descriptions You can adjust the values of certain sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Note • Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program. ■ INIT.DLY (initial delay) (P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Control range: 1 – 99 msec Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large room, set it to a large value. Sound source First reflection Time Level Level Level Early reflections Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound source Reflection surface Large value = 99 ms Small value = 1 ms ■ ROOM SIZE (P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Time Level Level Level Sound source Early reflections Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 56 0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 56 1/16/1, 11:45 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ LIVENESS Function: Sound source INTRODUCTION This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control range: 0 – 10 Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The “LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Level Level Dead Time Time Time Small reflected sound Large reflected sound BASIC OPERATION Sound source Small value = 0 PREPARATION Level Live Large value = 10 ■ S.DELAY (surround delay) Function: ■ S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. Control range: 1 – 49 msec ADVANCED OPERATION This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 57 0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 57 1/16/1, 11:45 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S.LIVENESS (surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 10 ■ CT.DELAY (center delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec ■ LS.DELAY (left surround delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec ■ RS.DELAY (right surround delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec 58 0111V620(UCA)_54-58_EN 58 1/16/1, 11:45 AM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem No sound and/or no picture. Refer to page Firmly connect the power cord. 18 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 18 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 20 The BLUE BACK setting under “9 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 41 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 23 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 16, 17 16, 17 23 Turn up the volume. 24 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 24 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The picture does not appear. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. 14, 15 The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 18 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 43 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 24 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. APPENDIX Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The volume is turned down. ADVANCED OPERATION The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. BASIC OPERAIONT On-screen display does not appear. Remedy PREPARATION The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. 12 – 17 English 59 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 59 1/16/1, 1:21 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause No sound from the effect speakers. Remedy The sound effect is off. Press EFFECT to turn it on. 28 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 51, 52 24 A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 42 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 36 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. 42 A monaural source is being played with the program 9. Select another DSP program. “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 38 “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 38 51, 52 — “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 36, 37 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 12, 13 The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through an MC-head amplifier. A “humming” sound can be heard. The volume level is low while playing a record. 60 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 51, 52 — The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. Refer to page 60 1/16/1, 1:21 PM 38 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. The effect and surround sounds cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the effect and surround sounds by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “10 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 41 Turn on the power to the component. 12 12 – 15 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 19 ADVANCED OPERATION If you want the DSP program name display to be shown constantly, set the OSD mode to full display. BASIC OPERAIONT The OSD mode is set to short display or display off. PREPARATION When TUNER is selected, the DSP program name shown on the display immediately changes to the frequency. INTRODUCTION 34 APPENDIX English 61 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 61 1/16/1, 1:21 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. 29, 30 There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 29 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 29 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. There are continuous AM crackling and hissing noises. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). Remedy Refer to page Problem 62 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 62 1/16/1, 1:21 PM 29, 30 31 29, 30 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Refer to page The remote control does not work nor function properly. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Set the selector dial to the appropriate position, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 44 — The remote control cannot control system components. The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. Enter the code again. 49 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. — After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. BASIC OPERAIONT Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. PREPARATION The unit or other component cannot be controlled. Cause INTRODUCTION Remedy Problem ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 63 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 63 1/16/1, 1:21 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................ 100 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ............ 90 W 1 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................ 110 W 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] .......... 100 W • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ................................................... 115 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms [U.S.A. and Canada models] ....................... 130/150/190/240 W [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ..................................................................... 120/140/175/210 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia, Singapore, China and General models] ................................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) /23 µV (38.5 dBf) • Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz) ................................ 75 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 81 dB/75 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.1%/0.2% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 48 dB • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Frequency Response (20 Hz to 15 kHz) .................................. ±1 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (MM) .................................................................. ±0.5 dB AM SECTION • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO MM (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V, REC OUT) .... 0.02% or less CD, etc. (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R) ............................................................................... 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...... 86 dB or more [Australia and Singapore models] ........................ 81 dB or more CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Phones Output ..................................................... 400 mV/560 ohms • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ...................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Maximum Input Signal PHONO MM (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ...................... 100 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................... 2.2 V or more • Output Level REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ....................... 531 to 1611 kHz [China and General models] 10 kHz step ....................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz 9 kHz step ......................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 52 dB GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [Singapore model] ............................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ........................ AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A., Australia, Singapore, China and General models] .......................................................................................... 260 W [Canada model] ...................................................... 260 W/330 VA Standby Mode [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................. 0.8 W [Australia and Singapore models] ..................................... 0.9 W • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5-ch, 10% THD ................................................................... 610 W • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and General models] ........................................................................... 2 (SWITCHED) [Australia model] .................................................. 1 (SWITCHED) • Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...................... NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] ........................................... PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • S-Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms • Weight ................................................................................... 10.5 kg • Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control ....................................................................................... Batteries ......................................................................... AM loop antenna ...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ................................................................. Quick Reference Card ........................................................................ Connection Guide * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Component Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms PB/CB, PR/CR ....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms 64 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 64 1/16/1, 1:21 PM GLOSSARY This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Dolby Digital ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP APPENDIX DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. BASIC OPERAIONT Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ CINEMA DSP PREPARATION ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. INTRODUCTION ■ Dolby Surround English 65 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 65 1/16/1, 1:21 PM GLOSSARY ■ S VIDEO signal ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 66 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 66 1/16/1, 1:21 PM INDEX M Accesories ................................................................................... 3 AC outlets .................................................................................. 18 Antennas .................................................................................... 29 Manufacturer codes ................................................................ 49, i Memory back-up ..................................................... 31, 36, 42, 55 MEMORY GUARD (SET MENU) ........................................... 41 Muting ....................................................................................... 24 B Balance (L/R BALANCE) (SET MENU) ................................. 38 BGV function ............................................................................ 25 C Rear panel .................................................................................. 10 Recording .................................................................................. 34 Remote control Basic operation ..................................................................... 6 Batteries ................................................................................ 3 Operation range .................................................................... 8 Setup codes ......................................................................... 49 S TAPE/MD position .................................................................... 46 Test tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) ............................................... 21 TV position ................................................................................ 48 Tuning Automatic tuning ................................................................ 30 Manual tuning .................................................................... 30 F I IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ........................................... 18 INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ................................................... 39 Input modes ............................................................................... 25 I/O ASSIGNMENT (SET MENU) ...................................... 39, 66 L LFE ...................................................................................... 40, 65 V VCR position ............................................................................. 48 Video jacks ................................................................................ 14 Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................................................... 28, 65 67 0112V620(UCA)_59-67_EN 67 1/16/1, 1:21 PM English T HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) ................................................ 39 External decoder ........................................................................ 13 APPENDIX H E ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front panel ................................................................................... 4 Front panel display ...................................................................... 9 Sampling frequency ............................................................. 24, 66 Selector dial ........................................................................... 6, 44 SET MENU ............................................................................... 35 SILENT CINEMA ............................................................... 28, 65 Sleep timer ................................................................................. 43 Sound field ................................................................................ 54 SP DELAY TIME (SET MENU) .............................................. 41 Speaker Output levels (LEVEL mode) ............................................ 36 Output mode (SET MENU) ............................................... 20 Placement ........................................................................... 11 Output balance (test tone) .................................................. 21 SPEAKER SET (SET MENU) CENTER SP ....................................................................... 36 LFE/BASS OUT ................................................................ 38 MAIN LEVEL .................................................................... 38 MAIN SP ............................................................................ 37 REAR L/R SP ..................................................................... 37 Stereo reproduction ................................................................... 28 Subwoofer ................................................................................. 17 S VIDEO ................................................................................... 66 ADVANCED OPERATION Delay time ................................................................................. 41 DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) BLUE BACK ..................................................................... 41 DIMMER ........................................................................... 41 OSD SHIFT ........................................................................ 41 DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU) D-RANGE .......................................................................... 40 LFE LEVEL ....................................................................... 40 Dolby Digital ............................................................................. 65 Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ........................................... 65 DSP program CINEMA DSP program ...................................................... 51 Hi-Fi DSP program ............................................................. 51 DTS ........................................................................................... 65 DTS SET (SET MENU) ............................................................ 40 Dust protection cap .................................................................... 12 DVD/LD position ...................................................................... 47 DVD MENU position ................................................................ 47 R BASIC OPERAIONT D PCM ........................................................................................... 66 PHONO jacks ............................................................................ 12 Playing ....................................................................................... 23 Power supply cords ................................................................... 18 Preset stations Exchanging preset station ................................................... 33 Tuning in to a preset station ............................................... 32 Presetting stations Automatic presetting .......................................................... 31 Manulal presetting .............................................................. 32 PREPARATION CBL/SAT position ..................................................................... 48 CD position ................................................................................ 46 CINEMA DSP ..................................................................... 52, 65 Component video ...................................................................... 66 Connections Antennas ............................................................................. 29 Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder, CD player and turntable) .................................................... 12 External decoder ................................................................. 13 Power supply cords ............................................................ 18 Speakers ............................................................................. 16 Video components (DVD player, VCR and TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ......................... 14 P INTRODUCTION A LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT TV A-MARK 1161 A TANDY 0941 ABEX 1151 ADMIRA 1141 ADVENTURA 1131 AIKO 1121 AIWA 1481 AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111 ALBA 0431 ALLERON 1091 AMBASSADOR 1081 AMSTRAD 0481, 1081 ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051, 1061, 1071 ANAM NATIONAL 1041 AOC 0361, 1021, 1031, 1111, 1161 ARCHER 1161 AUDIOSONIC 1001 AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161 BAUER 0441 BAUR 1001 BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561 BELCOR 1031 BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991 BEON 1001 BRADFORD 1051 BROCKWOOD 1031 BROKSONIC 1161 BUSH 1001 CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1131 CAPEHART 1021 CARVER 0101 CATHAY 1001 CELEBRITY 0951 CENTURION 0411 CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561, 1621 CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1121, 1131 CLAIRTONE 1011 CLARIVOX 1001 CONCERTO 0351, 0971 CONROWA 1751 CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011, 1051 CORANDO 0941 CRAIG 0251, 1051 CROWN 0941, 1051 CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361, 0931, 0941, 0981, 1111 CXC 1051 DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331, 0721, 0941, 1001, 1031, 1121, 1191, 1531, 1581, 1591, 1601 DANSAI 1001 DAYTRON 0941, 1031 DECCA 0271, 1001 DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071 DUMONT 0891, 1031 DYNATECH 0881 ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011 ELECTROHOME 0941 ELECTRON 0941 ELIN 1001 ELTA 0331 EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0091, 0111, 0811, 0821, 0831, 0841, 0851, 0861, 0871, 0901, 0921, 0941, 0981, 1011, 1031, 1051, 1081, 1091 ENVISION 0361, 1111 ERRES 1001 ETRON 0331 FERGUSON 1001 FINLUX 1001 FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981 FORMENTI 0441 FORMONTI 1001 FORTRESS 1141 FUJITSU 1091 FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501, 1521 FUTURETECH 1051 GE 0131, 0161, 0201, 0751, 0761, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0811, 0861, 1041 GEC 0271, 1001 GEMINI 0391 GENEXXA 0431 GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111 GOLDSTAR 0031, 0121, 0351, 0411, 0731, 0741, 0861, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 GOODMANS/TASHIKO 0271, 0661, 1001 GRANADA 1001 GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1851, 1861, 1871, 1881 GUNPY 1051, 1091 H/K 0721 HALLMARK 0861 HANSEATIC 1001 HARVARD 1051, 1061 HINARI 1001, 1091 HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671, 0681, 0691, 0701, 0711, 0871, 0941, 0971, 1351 HYPSON 1001 IMA 1051 INDIANA 1001 INFINITY REFERENCE 0101 INTERFUNK 1001 ITT 0611 JANEIL 1131 JBL 0101 JCB 0951 JENSEN 0311 JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551, 1561, 1571, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1651, 1691, 1731 JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641, 0651, 0661, 0841, 1201, 1211, 1221 KAWASHO 0901 KAYPANI 1021 KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111 KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131 KTV 0921, 0941, 1011, 1051, 1111 LEYCO 1001 LIESENK & TTER 1001 LLOYTRON 0941 LOEWE 1001 LOGIK 0991, 1771 LUXMAN 0351, 0971 LXI 0101, 0621, 0761, 0861, 0981 MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391, 0401, 0411, 0421, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0661, 0961, 1111 MAJESTIC 0991 MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361, 1001, 1111 MARK 1001 MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001 MEDIATOR 1001 MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161 MEI 1011 M-ELECTRONIC 1001 MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861, 0971, 0981, 0991, 1771 METZ 1791, 1831, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1941 MGA 0361, 0561, 0571, 0861, 1031, 1111 MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891, 0941, 1151 MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561, 0571, 0661, 0861, 1031, 1101, 1381 MONTGOMERY 1091 MOTOROLA 1041, 1141 MTC 0351, 0361, 0881, 0931, 0971, 1011, 1031, 1111 MULTITECH 0881, 1051 NAD 0551, 0621, 0861 NEC 0241, 0351, 0361, 0661, 0971, 1031, 1111, 1321, 1711 NECKERMANN 1001 NEI 1001 NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001, 1151 NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121 NOVABEAM 0721 NTC 1121 ONWA 1051 OPTIMUS 0551 OPTONICA 0541, 1141 ORION 0831, 1001 OSAKI 0271, 1151 OTTO VERSAND 1001 PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251, 0751, 1041, 1311, 1371, 1431 PANDA 1541, 1721 i 03V620_code(US/UCA) 2 1/16/1, 1:25 PM PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521, 0531, 0621, 0731, 0751, 0761, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0931, 0941, 1031, 1041, 1111, 1151, 1161 PEONY 1561, 1621 PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1031, 1111 PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001 PHONOLA 1001 PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111 PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871 PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121 PRICECLUB 0931 PRISM 0751 PROSCAN 0761 PROTECH 1001 PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941, 1021, 1161 PULSAR 0891 PULSER 1031 QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041 QUELLE 1001 RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1151 RADIOLA 1001 RCA 0051, 0141, 0151, 0181, 0411, 0491, 0531, 0761, 0771, 0871, 1031 REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941, 0971, 0981, 1031, 1051, 1111, 1151 RHAPSODY 1011 R-LINE 1001 RUNCO 0891, 1111 SAISHO 0331, 1081 SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021, 1111, 1151 SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351, 0361, 0861, 0931, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 SAMSUX 0941 SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271, 0661, 0801, 0911, 0981, 1231, 1251, 1261 SBR 1001 SCHEIDER 1001 SCIMITSU 1031 SCOTCH 0861 SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1091 SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171, 0351, 0481, 0521, 0621, 0761, 0801, 0861, 0971, 0981, 1091 SHANGHAI 1561, 1681 SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541, 0661, 0911, 0941, 1141, 1241, 1271 SHOGUN 1031 SIGNATURE 0991, 1771 SIMPSON 0581, 0961 SOLAVOX 1151 SONOKO 1001 SONTEC SONY 1001 0371, 0451, 0661, 0841, 0951, 1281, 1441 SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051, 1091 SOUNDWAVE 1001 SPECTRICON 1161 SQUAREVIEW 0481 SSS 1031, 1051 STAR-LITE 1051 SUPREM 0951 SUPRE-MACY 1131 SURPA 0351, 0971 SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1111 SYMPHONIC 0481 SYSLINE 1001 TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141 TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001, 1041, 1161 TCL 1561, 1631, 1701 TECHNICS 0751 TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971 TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1051, 1091, 1121, 1131, 1771 TELETECH 0331 TERA 0501 THAKRAL 1671 THORM 1001 TMK 0351, 0861, 0971, 1081 TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621, 0661, 0931, 0981, 1301 TOSONIC 1011 TOTEVISION 0941 TRICAL 0911 UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791 UNIVERSUM 1001 VECTOR RESEARCH 0361, 1111 VESTEL 1001 VIDEO CONCEPT 1101 VIDIKRON 0101, 0211 VIDTECH 0861, 1031 VIKING 1131 WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451, 0541, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1091, 1111, 1771 WATSON 1001 XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661, 1741, 1761 YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111 YOKO 1001 ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891, 0991, 1771 ZONDA 1161 CABLE TV ABC 0256, 0376 ANTRONIX 0136 ARCHER 0136, 0286 BBT 0076 CABLETIME 0166 CABLEVISION 0196 COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346 COMTRONICS 0216, 0276 EAGLE COMTRONICS 0276 EASTERN 0066 ELECTRICORD 0206 ELECTUS 0266 GE 0116, 0126 GEC CABLE SYSTEM 0196 HAMLIN H5 0676 HAMLIN H6 0666 HAMLIN H6S 0656 HAMLIN H8 0646 HAMLIN H9 0636 JERROLD 0256 JERROLD 400L 0626 JERROLD 450L 0616 JERROLD 550 0606 JERROLD OSD CATV 0596 JERROLD SPRUCER 0436 MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS 0416, 0426 MAMM 0296 MEMOREX 0386 MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206 NORTHCOAST 0016 NSC 0146 OAK 0106 OAK SIGMA 450 0546 OAK SIGMA 550 0536 PANASONIC TZ 120/130 0476 PANASONIC TZ 170/180 0446 PANASONIC TZ140 0466 PANASONIC TZ150/160 0456 PARAGON 0386 PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306, 0316, 0326, 0336, 0346 PIONEER 0006, 0086 PIONEER BR50 0846 PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82 0696 PIONEER BR90 0556 PULSAR 0386 RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE SYSTEM 0396, 0406 REALISTIC 0136 REGENCY/EASTERN 0686 RUNCO 0386 SAMSUNG 0276 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475 0576 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75 0366, 0586 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650 0566 SIGNAL 0276 SL MARX 0276 SPECTAVISION 0236 STANDARD COMPONENTS 0186 STARCOM V 0256 STARGATE 0276 SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN 0376, 0496 TEKNIKA 0176 TELESERVICE 0056 TELEVIEW 0276 TEXSCAN 0186, 0376 TFC 0026 TOCOM 0226, 0356 TOCOM 5503A 0526 TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516 TOCOM TC56 0506 TOSHIBA 0386 TUDI 0046 UNIKA 0136 UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206, 0286 VIDEOWAY 0096 VIEWSTAR 0216 ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486 SATELLITE TUNER ALPHA STAR 0826 CHAPARRAL 0756 ECHOSTAR 0836 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0776, 0876 HTS 0836 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0816 JERROLD 0776, 0786 PANASONIC 0806 PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786 RCA 0766 SONY 0796 (DSS) HITACHI MAGNAVOX MEMOREX PHILIPS STAR CHOICE TOSHIBA UNIDEN 0856 0886 0886 0886 0876 0866 0886 VCR A TANDY ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 0902 0992 0982 0992 0262, 0942, 0952, 0962, 0972 AMERICAN HIGH 0932 AMSTRAD 0992 ASA 0002, 0912 ASHA 0922 AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202 AUDIOVOX 0912 BEAUMARK 0922 BELL & HOWELL 0902 BLAUPUNKT 0412 BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892 BUSH 0852 CALIX 0912 CANON 0862, 0932 CCE 0852, 0982 CITIZEN 0912, 0982 COLT 0852 CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852, 0912, 0922 CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822, 0932 CYBERNEX 0922 DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982 DBX 0202 DYNATECH 0472, 0992 ELECTROHOME 0912 ELECTROPHONIC 0912 EMEREX 0792 EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142, 0152, 0162, 0172, 0182, 0192, 0212, 0702, 0712, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0752, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0872, 0882, 0892, 0912, 0952, 0992, 1072 FINLUX 0002, 0992 FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902 FUJI 0672, 0932 FUNAI 0992 GARRARD 0992 GE 0662, 0822, 0932 GO VIDEO 0642, 0652 GOLDSTAR 0082, 0632, 0912 GOODMANS 0402 GRADIENTE 0992 GRANDA 0612, 0902 GRUNDIG 0002 H/K 1082 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0992 HARMAN/KARDON 0632, 1082 HARWOOD 0752, 0852 HEADQUARTER 0612 HI-Q 0842 HINARI 0852 HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572, 0582, 0592, 0602, 0992 ITT 0942 JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532, 0542, 0552 KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612, 0632, 0902 KLH 0852 KODAK 0912, 0932 LLOYD 0992 LOGIK 0852 LUXOR 0942 LXI 0022, 0912 MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492, 0502, 0512, 0932 MAGNIN 0922 MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402, 0632, 0932 MARTA 0912 MATSUSHITA 0932 MATSUI 0722 MEI 0222, 0932 MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472, 0512, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 MGA 0762, 0952 MGA TECHNOLOGY 0922 MINOLTA 0592, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542, 0762, 0952, 1082 MOTOROLA 0472, 0932 MTC 0922, 0992 MULTITECH 0852, 0992 NAD 0442 ii 03V620_code(US/UCA) 3 1/16/1, 1:25 PM NEC 0122, 0202, 0292, 0422, 0432, 0542, 0632 NIKKO 0912 NOBLEX 0922 OLYMPUS 0412, 0932 OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912 OPTONICA 0402 ORION 0212, 0722, 0742, 0772 OSAKI 0912 PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092, 0222, 0372, 0382, 0392, 0412, 0932 PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602, 0632, 0692, 0912, 0922, 0932 PENTAX 0592, 0602 PERDIO 0992 PHILCO 0002, 0932 PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402, 0492, 0932 PILOT 0912 PIONEER 0442, 0542 PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022, 1032, 1042, 1052, 1062 PULSAR 0512 QUARTER 0612 QUARTZ 0272, 0612 QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932 RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992 RADIX 0912 RANDEX 0912 RCA 0112, 0382, 0392, 0482, 0592, 0602, 0662, 0822, 0942 REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612, 0682, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 RICOH 0352, 0362 SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0772 SALORA 0612, 0762 SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922, 0962 SANKY 0472, 0512 SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832 SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0922 SBR 0002, 0282 SCHEIDER 0852 SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762, 0872, 0882, 0892 SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602, 0612, 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0932 SHARP 0402, 0472 SHINTOM 0852 SHOGUN 0922 SINGER 0852 SONY 0032, 0332, 0352, 0362, 0672, 0792, 0932 STS 0602 SUNPAK 0352 SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502, 0762, 0932, 0992 SYMPHONIC 0992 TANDY 0992 TASHIKO 0712, 0992 TEAC 0992 TECHNICS 0932 TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932, 0992 TELEFUNKEN 0252 TMK 0212, 0732, 0772, 0922 TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342, 0622, 0682, 0712, 0762 TOTEVISION 0912, 0922 UNITECH 0922 VECTOR RESEARCH 0202, 0432, 0632 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0202, 0432, 0632, 0952 WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472, 0482, 0602, 0712, 0842, 0852, 0922, 0932, 0992 YAMAHA 0202, 0632 ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512, 0672 DVD PLAYER AKAI DENON HITACHI JVC KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0108 0368 0388 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048, 0188, 0248 0248 LD PLAYER AIWA 0157 DENON 0147 DISCO VISION 0017 FUNAI 0157 HITACHI (E) 0017 KENWOOD 0087, 0107 MAGNAVOX 0027 MARANTZ 0027 MITSUBISHI 0137 NAD 0137 PANASONIC 0077, 0177 PHILIPS 0027 PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137 RCA 0167 REALISTIC 0157 SHARP 0127 SONY 0047, 0057, 0117 VICTOR 0097 YAMAHA 0007, 0067 REALISTIC CD PLAYER ACOUSTIC RESEARCH 1295 ADC 0025, 0065 ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015 ADS 0265 AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035, 1055 AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535 ALPINE 1215, 1305 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545 BSR 0245, 0655, 0775 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 0055 CAPETRONIC 1205 CARRERA 0245 CARVER 0285, 1135 CASIO 0345 CROWN 0185 CURTIS MATHS 0345 DENON 0275, 0875, 0885 DEUAL (E) 0505 DYNAMIC BASS (H) 0555 EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105 EROICA 1275 FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925, 1005 GARRARD 0365 GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105 GOLDSTAR 1135, 1225, 1265, 1335 H/K 0105, 0175, 0465, 0995 HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505, 0815 INKEL 0115, 0395 JVC (VICTOR) 0315 KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405, 0585, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0755, 0895 KYOCERA 0025 LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675, 0705, 0715, 0985 MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645, 0955 MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375, 0785, 1345 MCINTOSH 0355, 1085 MCS 0905, 1315 MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235, 0305, 0325, 1105 MGA 0135 MISSION 0215 MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445 MTC 1255 NAD 0035, 0615, 0685, 0695 NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515 NEC 0255, 0905, 0965 NIKKO 0545, 1005 ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495, 0805, 1155 OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555, 0595, 0845, 0855, 0865, 0895, 0935 PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095, 1125 PENNY 0905 PHILIPS 0165, 0215 PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045 PROTON 0215, 1185 QUASAR 0055 RCA 0205, 0915, 1115 iii 03V620_code(US/UCA) 4 1/16/1, 2:46 PM 0205, 0225, 0235, 0325, 0555, 0845 REVOX 1175 ROTEL 0215 SABA TELECOMMANDER (E) 0505 SAE 0215 SAMSUNG 1285 SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975, 1025, 1105 SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635, 0765 SCOTT 0325, 1105 SEARS 0345 SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895, 1065, 1075 SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395, 0475 SIEMENTS GARRARD 1245 SIGNATURE 0175 SONTEC 1165 SONY 0065, 0565, 0865, 1145 STARON 1235 STS 0025 SYLVANIA 0215 SYMPHONIC 0335 TANDY 0305 TANGBERG 1195 TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385, 0525, 0795, 0835, 1355 TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095 TECHWOOD 1325 TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505 THOMSON (E) 0505 TOSHIBA 0035, 0685 VECTOR RESEARCH 0065, 1135 WARDS 0175 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0415, 0545, 0575, 1065 CD RECORDER/CDRW HITACHI JVC MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0474 0504 0484, 0494 0444 0454, 0464 0414 MD RECORDER KENWOOD PIONEER SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0384 0424 0434 0394 0024, 0394, 0404 TAPE DECK AIWA AKAI CARVER DENON FISHER GARRARD JVC (VICTOR) KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MITSUBISHI OPTIMUS ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER REVOX SANSUI SHARP SHERWOOD SONY TEAC TECHNICS WARDS YAMAHA 0094, 0214, 0224 0184 0094 0304 0144 0194, 0204 0274, 0284, 0294 0124, 0134, 0154, 0234, 0244, 0264 0094 0094, 0344 0184 0034, 0064, 0204, 0334 0364, 0374 0094 0034, 0044, 0064 0354 0094, 0344 0264 0334 0054, 0084, 0324 0194, 0254 0074, 0314 0034 0004, 0014, 0104, 0114, 0164, 0174, 0264 iv 03V620_code(US/UCA) 5 1/16/1, 1:25 PM UCA RX-V620 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V620(UCA)-cv1/4 1 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V722760 1/16/1, 11:06 AM Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source) Main speakers A DVD player AUDIO OUT OPTICAL L S VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Main speakers B COMPONENT VIDEO OUT R R OPTICAL OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L O R L COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT R L V S DIGITAL INPUT CD DVD GND R TUNER AM ANT GND + SPEAKERS — + — L FM ANT A D-TV/CBL COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL MONITOR OUT D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR B OUTPUT VIDEO CENTER + VIDEO SIGNAL OPTICAL MD/CD-R R R REAR (SURROUND) L — S VIDEO R SUB WOOFER L MAIN MD/CD-R R R + — + — CENTER L L REAR (SURROUND) R DIGITAL OUTPUT PHONO CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT VCR 1 IN OUT VCR 2/DVR SUB WOOFER OUTPUT S V * (Europe model) RX-V620RDS only * COMPONENT VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S VIDEO IN R V O Video signal Optical signal Signal flow Video Monitor Subwoofer system Center speaker R L Rear speakers V728180 RX-V620/RDS, HTR-5460 (ML) C-guide RX-V620(ML) 2 1/16/1, 11:23 AM Quick Reference Card AMP/TUN DSP DSP/TUN INPUT DSP INPUT Input selector buttons DSP program group buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT PRESET –/+ A/B/C/D/E TEST j/i A/B/C/D/E u/d SET MENU ON SCREEN LEVEL STANDBY TV POWER POWER VOLUME +/– TV VOLUME DSP program TV INPUT group buttons Input selector buttons SLEEP MUTE 6CH INPUT EFFECT TAPE/MD (CD-R) CD INPUT DSP A/B/C/D/E p Play DIR A (tape) b Skip – (MD/CD-R) w Rewind (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) INPUT Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R) INDEX (CD-R) +10 (MD/CD-R) Numeric buttons Deck A/B (tape) DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) INDEX +10 e Pause (MD/CD-R) r Rec/Pause (tape/MD) DSP a DIR B (tape) Skip + (MD/CD-R) s Stop f Fast forward (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) AV POWER DISC SKIP –/+ p Play b Skip – DISPLAY e Pause a Skip + w Search s Stop f Search A/B/C/D/E AV POWER V728090 V620(Q)_Quick 1 1/16/1, 11:25 AM Quick Reference Card DVD/LD DVD MENU INPUT DSP INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Numeric buttons INDEX/Time (DVD) Chapter/Time (LD) +10 INDEX +10 DISC SKIP –/+ DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD) p Play A/B/C/D/E b Skip – (DVD) Skip/Chapter – (LD) w Search DISPLAY e Pause a Skip + (DVD) Skip/Chapter + (LD) s Stop f Search Return A/B/C/D/E Menu select Menu right Menu left Menu down MENU TITLE AV POWER AV POWER TV VCR INPUT DSP CBL/SAT INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Ch enter/ Recall CH –/+ w Rewind A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY e Pause DSP INPUT Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Ch enter/ Recall CH –/+ CH –/+ _/_ _ _/_ _ *1 VCR REC p Play DISPLAY Menu up *1 VCR REC A/B/C/D/E VCR play DISPLAY VCR pause VCR stop VCR fast forward s Stop VCR rewind f Fast forward AV POWER TV POWER TV INPUT TV VOL +/– TV SLEEP Menu select Menu left A/B/C/D/E Recall VCR power Ch enter _/_ _ DISPLAY/ Guide (SAT) Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU AV POWER TV MUTE *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. V728090 V620(Q)_Quick 2 1/16/1, 11:25 AM
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79

Yamaha HTR-5460 Manual de usuario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
Manual de usuario
Este manual también es adecuado para